Home

DotNetNuke User Manual

1. d d E jar U dex e ic iE eels S Sala cs d fot He TM FS e Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only UTC 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana EI Display English Name Display Visibility Public Members Only C Admin Only Native Name Managing your User Profile Subscribing to Member Services Subscribing to a Member Service How to subscribe to a members service Once a user subscribes they immediately gain access to any modules or pages restricted to this service The user may need to refresh their web site browser to view additional areas of access 1 Login to the site Logging into a Site 2 Click on your Display Name link typically located in the top right corner of the site OR Navigate to a My Profile module This displays the My Profile page 3 Click the Edit Profile link This displays the Manage Profile page 4 Click the 4 Manage Services link This displays a list of the available services 5 Click the Subscribe link beside the service you want to subscribe to This displays the You have successfully subscribed to the Service Name role message at the top of the module Tip Where a fee is charged for the service you will be redirected to the payment Web site to complete the pay ment process Le Manage Profile u Manage User Credentials se Manage Password u Manage Profile O This section allows you to manage your subscript
2. Help URL http www dotnetnuke com default aspx tabid 787 f Enable Module Online Help 5 Click the amp Update link Enable Event Log Buffer Setting the Online Help URL How to set the URL for the Online Help service for all portals This is the URL associated with the Online Help button accessed via module menus Leave this field blank to remove Online Help for the Admin Host areas of DotNetNuke The default setting is to the Online Help provided by DNN Corp which is located at http www dotnetnuke com About DotNetNukeOnlineHelp tabid 787 Default aspx 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Goto the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 In Help URL text box choose one of these options a To set a custom URL Enter the URL to your help resource b To disable Online Help Leave this field blank c To restore Online Help URL to the default DotNetNuke Online Help Enter http www dotnetnuke com default aspx tabid 787 5 Click the T Update link Help URL http www dotnetnuke comy default aspx tabid 787 f Enable Module Online Help Enabling Disabling Online Module Help How to enable or disable online help option on the module menu If enabled a Help URL for the module will need to be added in the Module Definitions See Host Settings Module Definitions For custom modules this URL should be provided by the module development company
3. Preview it Container Setting the Edit Skin How to set the skin that is applied to the editing pages of the site E g module editing pages module settings pages Tip Choose a skin with minimal design and images to speed up editing time page settings pages etc Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site 1 from the Control Panel OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled Go to the Basic Settings section Maximize the Appearance section 5 At Edit Skin select from the following skin directories e Host Displays skins available to all sites within this DNN installation e Site Displays skins available to this site only 6 At Edit Skin select a skin from the drop down list or select lt None Specified gt to use the default edit skin as set by the Host 7 OPTIONAL Click the Preview link to preview the skin selected at Step 6 in a new web site browser 8 Click the g Update link Host Site YA Portal Skin DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width Preview Host Site DNN Blue Image Header White Backgrount t Portal Container iy Preview t Edit Skin Extropy portal C Preview Host Site Extropy basic table A Preview t Edit Container eting the Edit Skin Setting Module Layout amp Design Uploading Installing a Host Container How to u
4. How to authorize an unauthorized user account using the User Accounts module 1 Click the Unauthorized link to display only unauthorized accounts and find the required account 2 Click the Edit P button beside their record 3 Click the Authorize User link This display a message reading A User successfully Authorized at the top of the Edit User Accounts module The Authorized check box is now checked AR User successfully Authorized u Janage User Credentials W Manage Roles for this User Manage Password gt manage Profile T gt Edit User Accounts Edit User Garry Id 11 User Name Garry Created Date 9 4 2007 1 52 PM 9 First Name Garry Last Login Date 9 4 2007 1 52 PM Gadis cem Last Activity Date 9 4 2007 3 17 PM Last Password Change 9 4 2007 1 52 PM Last Lock out Date wa Display Name Garry Gazza 9 Email Address garry amp domrain com E User Is On Line A Delete v Jpdate Locked Out Authorized vs Update Password 9 Authorize User 9 Force Password Change add New User iManage Profile Properties Cancel Deleting a User Account How to permanently delete a user account from a site using the User Accounts module Tip If you don t want to permanently delete the user you can unauthorized their account instead Unauthor izing a User Account 1 Find the user to be deleted using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Delete 3 button beside their record Th
5. Name Module Module ane ContentPane Template Default nenu i E Title Insert Bottom w Insert Child of NewPage Midi Visibility Same As Page Add Page Add Module Actions Insert Page Insert Module Common Tasks Tab Current Page Tab Description Settings Section Link to edit current page settings See Editing Page Set tings Edit Actions Section Link to copy current L Copy page See Copying a Page Link to delete current X Delete page See Deleting a m Page Link to import a page Import See Importing a New Page ds Link to export a page See SEO Exporting a Page Update Current Page Section Add new page See Inserting a Page RibbonBar Copy Actions Section Copy current page per mission to children a A Copy pages dea ons See Copying Per to Children missions to Descendant Pages Copy current page design Copy skin and container set Design to tings to children Children See Copying Design to Children Pages Help Section Link new window to x Help Help URL defined in i Host Settings Visible When User has Manage Settings permission User has Copy Page permission User has Delete Page permission Enabled if the current page is not a special page I e Admin Host pages and pages in use under Site Set tings Advanced Settings Page Management User has Import Page permission See Importing a New Page User has Export Page permission Se
6. Select Install Available Extensions from the Extensions module menu OR Click the s Install Available Extensions link at the base of the module Go to the Available Modules section Check jm the check box beside each module to be installed Go to the Available Skins section Check jm the check box beside each skin to be installed Go to the Available Containers section Check jm the check box beside each container to be installed Go to the Available Languages section Check jm the check box beside each language to be installed Go to the Available Authentication Systems section Check jm the check box beside each authentication system to be installed Click the iy Install Selected Extensions link v y Install Available Extensions The following extensions are available for you to install Select the extension s you would like to install and then click the Install button Available Modules v Adsense 01 00 01 7 Announcements 04 00 03 El Blog 03 05 01 W Documents 04 01 00 Events 05 00 01 E FAQs 04 04 00 W Feedback 04 04 03 ElFormAndList 05 00 02 E Forum 04 04 03 I Help 03 00 02 Ml IFrame 04 03 00 7 Links 04 00 01 El Map 01 00 09 El MarketShare 01 00 00 Media 03 02 03 E NewsFeeds 04 00 01 Cl Reports 05 01 00 El Repository 03 01 15 E Store 02 01 00 7 Survey 04 60 00 E UsersOnline 05 01 00 E Wiki 04 01 00 E XML 04 03 04 Available Skins No Skins Ava
7. e See Enabling Disabling Inline Editing Adding Basic Text How to add basic text including basic HTML using the Basic Text Box of the HTML module 1 2230 NE M 7 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link At Editor select the Basic Text Box radio button above the Editor This displays the Editor as a Basic Text Box Content displays as HTML At Render Mode below the Editor select Text Click inside the Editor and then enter or paste Ctrl V your text OPTIONAL Click the wc Preview link OPTIONAL At Publish check jj the check box to publish OR Uncheck j the check box if the con tent is not yet ready for publishing Note This field only displays when Content Staging is enabled Set ting a Workflow Click the amp Save link Tip Strike the Enter key on your keyboard to create a line break HTML tags can be used Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor lt p gt lt span style background color Effff O strong Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Donec ipsum Ut molestie tincidunt diam Nulla consequat lt strong gt lt span gt lt p gt lt p gt lt span style background color Effff O strong version 2 lt strong gt lt span gt lt p gt my new textmy new text Render Mode Text Html Raw E Publish y Save a Cancel ha Preview Version History Item History Preview
8. 4 Click the OK button to confirm deletion kd pec Edit Vendors Vendor Details Address Details Other Details Vendor Classification Banner Advertising Affiliate Referrals Update Cancel Delete Last Updated By Administrator Account On 9 5 2007 1 27 11 PM Deleting a vendor accoun Vendor Banners Adding a Text Banner to a Vendor How to add a text banner to a vendor account using the Vendors module 1 Click the Edit gt button beside the required Vendor This opens the Edit Vendor page 2 Maximize the Banner Advertising section This displays all banners associated with this vendor 3 Click the Add New Banner link This opens the Edit Banner page 4 Complete the following banner fields a Inthe Banner Name text box enter the text to be displayed at the top of this banner This text is displayed as a link to the vendor s web site or to the URL Page or File as set at the URL field below b At Banner Type select Text c OPTIONAL In the Banner Group text box enter a name to group this banner with other banners The banner group can then be entered into the banners module to set it to only display banners in this group d OPTIONAL At Image Link select an image to be associated with this banner The image isn t displayed on the banner instead the image name is displayed as a link to view the image You can also select URL to add a link to an image file or page The full URL will be displayed on the text
9. 9 None File A File On Your Site E System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color lightgray Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None vs Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Host Site Module Container G lt Use Page Default V Preview Cache Time secs O 5 Click the amp Update link Tip Uncheck the Display Container check box to see how the border looks without a module container Administrator Profile Home Profile of our Wholistic Therapist Course Timetable Holistic Services Setting Visibility of Module Content How to enable or disable the Maximize Minimize button on a module This button is typically displayed in top right corner of the module container When content is minimized only the module title header and footer are vis ible IMPORTANT The Display Container setting must be checked to enable this function If it is not the Maximize Minimize button cannot be viewed Tip The icon image is only displayed if the container applied to the module includes the VISIBILITY skin token 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 At Collapse Expand select from the following options e M
10. Auto Unlock Accounts After Allowable File Extensions 7 Scheduler Mode Enable Event Log Buffer Help URL Enable Module Online Help vs Auto Sync File System ICONBAR Database File System Items Days Minutes Minutes swf Jpg Jpeg Jpe gif bmp png doc xls ppt pdf txt xml xsl css zip Request Method E http www dotnetnuke com default aspx tabid Ei Ei Enabling Disabling the Scheduler How to enable or disable the Scheduler on all portals and set the scheduler mode 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 At Scheduler Mode select from the following e Disabled Select to disable the scheduler e Timer Method Select to maintain a separate thread to execute scheduled tasks while the worker process is alive e Request Method Select to execute tasks when HTTP Requests are made 5 Click the amp Update link Scheduler Mode Request Method Disabled Timer Method Help URL Request Method f Enable Event Log Buffer Disabling Enabling Event Log Buffer How to enable or disable the Event Log Buffer for all new portals E Navigate to Host Host Settings Goto the Advanced Settings section N 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 At Event Log Buffer select from the following options e Check jg the check box to enable e Uncheck F the check box to disable
11. Community Edition 5 5 Quick Administration Guide DOTNETNUKE DotNetNuke Corporation www dotnetniuke com About This Manual LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LL L LL 17 About this DotNetNuke Manual zz 17 Content Overview 17 DotNetNuke Installation Wizard 19 About the Installation Wizard 19 Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard 19 Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard 23 Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard 35 Creating a Custom Installation Setup aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa ae 44 Managing Your User ACc0unt eee eaaa eee a 46 Signing Up for a User Account 46 Signing up as a Registered User 46 Signing up as a Registered User with a Security Code 47 Logging In and Qut ccc ec ec a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aaa aaa aa aaa 49 Logging into a Site kaaa 49 Logging Out of a Site 50 Remembering Login Credentials a a 50 Retrieving your Password 51 Managing Your Profile zzz 52 Changing your Password 52 Managing your Profile Photo 222220000020050000000 00000 00 a ANN N NA NAN NN AN kakak aaa 53 Managing your User Credentials 0 2 a 54 Managing your User Profile 55 Subscribing to Member ServiCces 2 20 00 0 ce ccc ececcccccecececececccceceeecectcteteeeeeeeees 58 Subscribing to a Member Service 58 Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Code 58 Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP L
12. OPTIONAL Select a new tab to set additional properties 3 Click the OK button Table Wizard Table Design Table Properties Cell Properties Accessibility Accessibility Options Heading rows Max 5 Heading columns D Max d Pricing Table Caption Caption Align E This table provides information on the pricing of products Summary Assaciate cells with headers etting lable Accessib1l Using the Table Wizard How to design a table using the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Click the Insert Table 2 Select Table Wizard This opens the Table Wizard on the Table Design tab A table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design 3 OPTIONAL Select a cell This enables the Increase and Decrease buttons which are available to change the design 4 Select an Increase or Decrease button to modify the table design You can choose to add columns and rows as well as span columns and rows 5 OPTIONAL Change tabs to set other properties 6 Click the OK button Setting the Table Design How to set the design a table using the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Open the Table Wizard See Inserting a Table OR Right click on an existing table and select Table Properties 2 Go to the Table Design tab If you are adding a new table a table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design If you are editing an existing table your current design is displa
13. President Hamid Karzai held talks here Monday with representatives of one of the key insurgent groups battling his government as the president continues his high stakes push for an eventual reconciliation among all of Al Qaeda linked group Hezb e Islami sets peace terms for Karzai Times Online Karzai holds peace talks with insurgents ABC Online Afghan President Meets With Insurgents New York Times Christian Science Monitor TIME ABC News all 805 news articles 1s OPML produces the below output in the Feed Explorer Setting the Feed Explorer Theme You can change the skin design applied to the Feed Explorer module Two skins or themes are supplied by default 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Goto the Feed Explorer Settings section 3 At Theme select a theme from the drop down box 4 Click the Update link Platinum Platinum Restoring Deleted Content Module Editors About the Recycle Bin Module The Recycle Bin module stores all pages and modules that have been deleted from a site These pages and mod ules can be restored to the portal or permanently removed The Pages Window e Pages are listed in the Recycle Bin by page name e Pages are listed in the order that they were deleted from most recently deleted to first deleted The Modules Window e Modules are listed in the Recycle Bin by page name module title E g Home Announcements e Modules are
14. Setting the minimum word length for searches Submitting Your Site To Search Engines About the Sitemap Module The Sitemap module enables authorized users any user authorized to view the module to configure a sitemap which can be submitted to one or more Search Engines for improved search optimization Sitemap provider for DotNetNuke allows any DotNetNuke module to participate into the Google Yahoo Bing Sitemap generation for your site Sitemap files generated by DotNetNuke Sitemap provider are fully compliant with protocol specification published at http www sitemaps org protocol php Sitemap b O Sitemap URL http fecozany cam SiteMap aspx Override Priority coreSitemapProvider El Base Page Urls Settings Modify the basic settings that apply to general DotNetNuke pages Use page level based priorities Mm Minimum Priority for pages Include Hidden Pages E Refresh Page Priorities El General Sitemap Settings Configure the settings that apply to all URLs included in the Sitemap Exclude urls with a priority lower than Days to cache Sitemap for 1 Day Clear Cache El Site Submission In this section you can submit your site to different search engines Search Engine Google Submit Create Save Sitemap Configuration e Sitemap Module Configuring the Sitemap Settings How to configure the search engine settings and priorities using the Sitemap module 1 Navigate to Admin Sea
15. e Write to Folder This enables users within the permitted roles to upload and delete files using the Link Control on modules such as the Links module How to assign permissions 1 Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Information Bar 2 Go to the Folder Security Settings section The current permission settings are displayed 3 At Permissions enter the username of the user into the Username text box 4 Click the Add link This adds the user s name to the Permission role list 5 In the View Folder column check jm the check box beside the user to grant them permission to view files 6 In the Write to Folder column check jm the check box beside the user to grant them permission to write to the folder 7 Repeat Step 4 6 for to assign folder permission to additional users 8 Click the Update link a Folder Security Settings t Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt View Folder Write to Folder Accounts Administrators All Users Marketing Maonthhy Online Magazine Unauthenticated Users View Folder Write to Folder Daisy Duckworth Cancel Removing Folder Permissions How to remove permission to view files within a folder and or to write to a folder of the File Manager module 1 Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Informati
16. 2 Navigate to and select the folder containing the file to be downloaded 3 Click the linked file name 4 Save the file to your computer File Name GI allClipArt zip I BeachJog 100x565px qit za BeachJog 300x170px gif Eri Boxer 300x170px jpg Downloading a file Deleting a File How to permanently delete one file from the File Manager module 1 Navigate to and select the folder containing the file to be deleted 2 Click the Delete File y button beside the file to be deleted A dialog box asking Are You Sure You Wish to Delete The File FileName is displayed 3 Click OK to confirm deletion T Ej BeachJog 300x170px gif 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM 141118 Tre Boxer 200x1700 ipa 2 5 2007 4 40 17 PM lt 5 TOO F eleting a file Deleting Multiple Files How to permanently delete multiple files from the File Manager module 1 Navigate to and select the folder containing the files to be deleted 2 Check jy the check box beside each of the files to be deleted OR Click the Select All pj button to select all of the files currently displayed in the File List Window Selecting Files for more options 3 Click the ye Delete Files button This displays a list of the files selected for deletion 4 Click the Ok button to confirm deletion EM Move Files A Upload Delete Files 9 6 2007 7 29 58 PM A 9 6 2007 7 29 58PM A Adding Search Capabilities To Your Site About the Search Admin Modu
17. 222 000 aa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa eaaa 263 Displaying News in the Feed Explorer 2 20 0 220 aaa aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 205 Displaying Custom OPML using a Custom URL or File aaa a 266 Displaying Custom OPML using Custom Text 267 Setting the Feed Explorer Theme 2 2200 22200 aaa cc cccc cece a a a aaa a a aa a aaa aaa aaa 268 Restoring Deleted Content 269 Module Ed RA 269 About the Recycle Bin Module aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa a a aaa a aaa ae 269 Restoring Deleted Modules aa a aaa aaa a aa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 270 Restoring Deleted Pages_ a cence a a aa a aaa s aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 271 Adding Privacy and Terms of Use Statements 272 Configuring the Portal Language Settings 272 Example Editing Privacy and Terms of Use Statements 273 Working With Files And Images 1 1 1 1 275 About the File Manager Module 275 Working with Folders aaa aaa aa aa aa aa aaa aa aa a a aa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa 257 Navigating to and Selecting Folders aa aa aaa a cnc cee aaa a aaa a a aaa 277 Adding a New Folder 277 Assigning Folder Permissions by Role 278 Assigning Folder Permission to a User 22200200000000 00 0000 NN AA em aaa kaaa 279 Removing Folder Permissions 222 0000 a 280 Deleting a Folder ANA Rs me eese ee eee eere eer ere neris 281 Working with Files
18. 51 Characters 323 2 ap Save Cancel A Preview e Kadbdlitor Check Spelling How to check spelling using the RADEditor 1 Place your cursor inside the Editor 2 Click the AJAX Spellchecker Ed icon This starts spell checking Misspelled words are highlighted in yel low The first misspelt word is ready to perform one of the following actions against e Choose Suggested Select the correct word from the list of suggested words E Ignore Ignore All Select to ignore this word and continue with spell checking Change Manually Select and enter word into the provided text box then click the Change Manually icon Add to Dictionary Select to add the word to your dictionary 3 Repeat for each misspelt word 4 Click the Finish Spellchecking button when you are finished OR Cancel to exit Spell checking mode Tip Edit any misspelt word by clicking on it Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Spell checking mode Misspelled words are highlighted in yellow Finish spellchecking Information Compony which sells a wide range of Eco Friendly tovs and games Many EcoZany I handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade Ignore p2 Change Manually Addto dictionary veloped a pricing structure for our products which ensures producers in developing countries are not disadvantaged pe ecking using the RadEditor Formatting Code Block How to insert a code block in the RADeditor Rich Text
19. An image will not display in the HTML modules if it is set as hidden You must be an Administrator of this site to remove the hidden property from a file 1 Navigate to Admin gt File Manager OR Click E Files in the Control Panel 2 Click the Rename File button beside the file to be edited 3 Uncheck the H check box to remove the hidden property from the file 4 Click the Save Changes button to save your changes Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying An image will not display in the HTML modules if it is set as hidden You must be an Administrator of this site to remove the hidden property from a file 1 Navigate to Admin gt File Manager OR Click ay Files in the Control Panel 2 Click the Rename File button beside the file to be edited 3 Uncheck j the H check box to remove the hidden property from the file 4 Click the Save Changes button to save your changes Module Editors Adding Editing Text Inline How to add and edit text inline on the HTML module Note Inline editing may not be enabled 1 Hover your mouse over the content of the HTML module An Edit button will appear 2 Click the Edit button Kabi rem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat s JAcilisis Vestibulum eleifend magna quis fermentum fermentum orci justa viverra ligula id m tristique est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Nam la DOTN
20. Austria 3461 61 54 98987654 61 54 98987111 www dnnangel com TETEE I U dex x es 5 d wf fon el e T 4 7 8110 Hella my name is Daisy and work as the head chef atthe Trentham bistro My desserts are well known throughout the district especially my apple pig E Managing a user profile Managing a User s Password How to change or reset a user s password as well as view details regarding the user s current password settings using the User Accounts module 1 2 Find the user to be edited using a filter or by searching Click the Edit gt button beside the required user account Click the 45 Manage Password link The following details regarding the user s password are displayed e Password Last Changed Displays the date the password was last changed e Password Expires Displays the date the password will expire if any To change the password perform the following in the Change Password section a In the New Password text box enter a new password b In the Confirm Password text box re enter the new password To reset the password perform the following in the Reset Password section a Click the gj Reset Password link This generates a random password which is sent to the user s email address Click the 44 Cancel link to return to the User Accounts page Y ig Edit User Accounts uv Manage User Credentials t3 Manage Roles for this User Man Mana
21. Click the Preview Content c button beside the required version This displays the content in the Preview Content section below The Item History section displays information for that version Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Paragraph St gt Font Name Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aenean dolor erat fringilla vehicula porta non mattis ut neque Nullam rhoncus lectus et vehicula aliquam nisl metus volutpat nunc ut consequat libero turpis in urna Vestibulum porta dui non sapien sollicitudin bibendum Morbi varius lacus magna Etiam blandit rhoncus posuere sa Vivamus at nisi eu lectus malesuada lobortis Donec commodo neque sed enim vulputate sed ornare felis imperdiet DOTNETNUKE se Quisque venenatis tincidunt tellus in mattis libero x DAG ANA Quisque ultrices lacus eu enim accumsan quis dapibus justo dapibus Design 4 HTML Wonlz25 Character 59 2 amp 9 Publish ap Save Cancel A Preview Teviewing conten Managing My Workflow Tasks How to view and update content that required reviewing before it can be published using the HTML module Note This task requires that Workflow is NOT set to direct publish Setting a Workflow 1 Select amp My Work from the HTML module menu This displays the My Work page and a list of the con tent to be reviewed and published 2 Click on one of the listed Page Name links This displays
22. DNN Blue Image Header White Backar A Preview Host Site DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width A Preview t Edit Skin 9 Host Site DNN Blue Image Header White Ba TIOR Preview TA Edit Container Upload Skin LI Upload Container Setting the Edit Container How to set the container that is applied to the modules on the editing pages of the site E g module editing pages module settings pages page settings pages etc Tip Choose a container with minimal design and images to speed up editing time Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site uy from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 Maximize the Appearance section 5 At Edit Container select from the following container directories e Host Displays containers available to all sites within this DNN installation e Site Displays containers available to this site only 6 At Edit Container select a container from the drop down list or select None Specified gt to use the default edit container as set by the Host 7 OPTIONAL Click the Preview link to preview the container selected at Step 6 in a new web site browser 8 Click the iy Update link Host Site Portal Skin DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width v Preview i 9 Host Site
23. How to enable or disable inline editing If selected this setting enables authorized users to perform basic editing of HTML module content directly on the page Inline editing also enables authorized users to edit module titles on the page These inline editing features are offered in addition to the usual methods for editing content and module titles 1 Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site ui from the Control Panel 2 Maximize the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Usability Settings section 4 At Inline Editor Enabled check Fj the check box to enable inline editing OR Uncheck mto disable it B B 5 Click the Update link a Usability Settings Inline Editor Enabled d Demis 1entum fermentum orci justo viverra ligula id YA istinye est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Je DOTNETNUKE Update ellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee Marketplace a iscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euismod in ac libero Vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sodales varius Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim Donec ut augue in tortor mattis ullamcorper et non nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncus P Edit Content Hiding content 1nine Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying
24. Subscribers E Additional Emails julie smith domain com wang chung domain com au From lorraine young domain com Reply To campaigns domain com Subject Remidial Massage Centre Newsletter No 1 a Message You can use the Editor below to write your message Basic Text Box amp Rich Text Editor E Source 3 iF Y a Sac P ara E 8 Uu Style Format I Font B Size A a i E Welcome to the first edition of the Remedial Massage Centre newsletter This month we have a number of great new offers to whet your appetite Including 20 off Remedial Massage for all out subscribers Click here for details of this and other special subscriber offers Show custom editor options Refresh Editor a Advanced Settings In this section you can set up the advanced settings for your message Attachment File Location Root File Name None Specified Upload New File C3 Sending a basic newsletter Remedial Massage Centre Newsletter No 1 Unicode UTF 8 File Edit View Tools Message Help Reply WE Reply All Forward ci 14 EE From host domain com lt host domain com Date Thursday 6 September 2007 10 45 AM To host domain com host domain come Subject Remedial Massage Centre Newsletter No 1 Attach Documents Yoga Timetable pdf 71 9 KB Welcome to th
25. User FirstName User LastName User Username Membership Tokens Example USD admin domain com Copyright 2009 by My Website Portals o MyWebsite logo gif My Website 480 John Smith JohnSmith domain com John Smith Smithy M DONE NUKE D ilah PROP ESSTONNT DOTNETNUKE Token Description Displays the portal currenc set on the Site Settings pag Displays the portal descript set on the Site Settings pag Displays the email address primary Administrator as s Site Settings page Displays the copyright text in the Copyright field on th Settings page Portal relative Path of Ho Directory Portal Path to Logo file E logo gif The portal description as se Site Settings page Difference in minutes betw tal default time and UTC The display name of the us The email address of the us The first name of the user The last name of the user The username of the user Membership Approved Yes No Membership CreatedDate 10 4 2007 1 08 PM Membership IsOnline Page Tab Tokens Tab Description Tab FullUrl Tab IconFile Tab KeyWords Tab TabName Tab TabPath Tab URL Date Tokens DateTime Now DateTime Now Tick Tokens Ticks Now Ticks Today Ticks TicksPerDay Previewing Content Yes No Welcome to My Website http www domain com Services tabid 73 Default aspx icon gif health wellbeing yoga yoga classes Home 10 17 200
26. check jy the check box to set the reviewers specified at Permissions to receive an email notification once a version reaches this state For the published state the author of the ver sion will receive an email notification once it is published d At Active check Fi the check box to enable this new state OR Uncheck the check box to dis able o 9 Click the Save link Enabling Disabling Token Replacement How to enable or disable token replacement on the HTML module Token replacement enables you to replace tokens like object property format for objects Tab Module Portal Settings or User with the appropriate envi ronment values Note Inline editing and module caching are displayed if Token replacement is used ET Select 7 Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 7 button 2 Maximize the HTML Module Settings section 3 At Replace Tokens select from these options e Check jj the check box to enable full token replacement e Uncheck the check box to disable token replacement Any tokens will display as text Click the Update link P FH HTML Module Settings f Help In this section you can set up settings that are specific for this module tf Replace Tokens v Workflow Content Staging gt gt Draft gt gt Published Allows an author to manage content in a staging area before publishing it ta the site V Update X Delete cancel Created By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM Last Upda
27. e Top Select to add the module above all existing modules within the selected pane Skip to Step 9 e Above Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added above e Below Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added below e Bottom This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane This is the default option 8 Click the P Add Module To Page link For modules that enable you to add content Related Topics e Adding Module Content Add New Module Module About Us Pa areng ContentPane Visibility Same As Page Module Links a Add Module To Page Editing Module Title Inline How to edit the title of a module inline Note If this setting has been disabled the title can instead be edited by a Page Editor on the Module Settings page See About Module Settings 1 Place your mouse over the module title to be edited This displays the Edit Aj button above the module title Documents E Title OwnerTest Category Modified Date Size P Enrollment Form Pablo Emmanuel Forms 5 2 2008 3 29 KB P Health Benefits Claims Albert Skittle Forms 5 2 2008 12 56 KB P Yoga Timetable Lorraine Young Timetables 5 2 2008 3 03 KB Add New Document Ki 2 Click the Edit j p Pa s F Documents button This
28. page Note Access to view and set page permissions is only available to Administrators and users with Edit Full Control permissions for the page See About Page Permissions IMPORTANT In DNN Community edition page management permissions consist of View and Edit per missions only In DNN Professional page management includes ten different permissions for page management which are the same for both users and roles See About Page Permissions 1 Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section 2 Goto Permissions 3 At Username enter the username of a user that you want to grant or deny page viewing permissions to and then click the ef Add link 4 OPTIONAL At Filter By Group select from the following options e All Roles gt Select to view all roles both global role and roles groups in one single list e lt Global Roles gt Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group E g Admin istrators All Users Registered Users and Unauthenticated Users e Role Group Name Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group 5 In the View or View Page column click on the check box beside a user role repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed e Permission Granted Permission to view the page is granted e j Permission Denied Permission to view the page is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot view the
29. pu s mp Bee 9 93MB of unlimited Items Per Page 10 g Folder Security Settings p Filter By Group Global Roles View Folder Write to Folder Administrators 4 All Users Monthly Online Magazine Newsletter Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users Username Add Update Cancel e File Manager module Working with Folders Navigating to and Selecting Folders Navigating to a folder within the File Manager To view a folder Click the Maximize button beside a folder to view its child folders To hide a folder Click the Minimize button beside a folder to close it and hide its child folders To select a folder Click on a folder name to select it The selected folder name is highlight with a gray background color The related files are then displayed in the Files List to the right Adding a New Folder How to add folders to the File Manager module The default security settings for new folders authorizes all users to view the files within the folder This is required to enable unauthenticated users to view files on the site such as images displayed in modules or files added for download Only Administrators are authorized to write upload files to the folder Assigning Folder Permission to a User and Assigning Folder Permissions by Role for more details 1 Navigate to and select the parent folder for the new folder E g PortalRoot 2 On the Folders Toolbar perform the following
30. to disable the auto unlock feature Auto unlock is set to 10 minutes by default 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 In the Auto Unlock Accounts After text box enter the time period in minutes 5 Click the g Update link Fl Other Settings TA Control Panel ICONBAR f Site Log Storage Database File System f Site Log Buffer 1 Items f Site Log History 0 Days YA Disable Users Online Fa TA Users Online Time F Minutes Auto Unlock Accounts After Minutes Managing Allowable File Extensions How to add edit and remove the file extensions that are allowed to be uploaded to this DNN installation by site Administrators and other authorized users The following file extensions are permitted by default jpg jpeg jpe gif bmp png doc xls ppt pdf txt xml xsl css zip 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 In Allowable File Extensions window perform one of the following e To add a file extension Enter the extension preceded by a comma E g fla wma e To remove a file extension Remove the three letter extension and the preceding comma 5 Click the ig Update link Other Settings Control Panel Site Log Storage Site Log Buffer Site Log History Disable Users Online Users Online Time
31. Accessibility 20 0 0 00000 ANAN aaa aaa a aaa aaa 246 Usine the Table AVIZGEQ pananaga nama NA Naa ahah pelea uh das TALKS bemus colat Do aa a de tse petu decease 247 Setting the Table Design kaaa 246 Using the Style Builder aaa aa a a cence cece a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 249 psp E EE SANTA NI TAN T NATA PANA 250 Nlamaeine em NAA 251 a KA Bi NGNE aa Per rn terse I papa BG IN anak 251 Savine a TEN DIA cT a aka a aa daha daa al a anga sabak ga d aaa 252 DANIEL conc iE M RE CAN AU BAS SUBONG ae a D E aaa 254 About tlie Banners MOGE aaa aba aa bse sth BE Dagan a a aa eae Rei Ed e ete gk aa EO ni ELE LoT 254 ADOUL Daniel bc tds 255 Displaying MISSE 257 Editing Banner DO DUO Sk ka sa eaaa naa gak ab a tenu Mela dM NA DA LAM ILLNM dC D M DL eM LEE LL a EDU a 258 Displaying Banners Horizontally 2 222200 occ cece cece cece II s IRI er eem a a aaa a a aaa aa ae 259 Displaying Banners Verucally uie eedem conoces u n sii E ee es ea eles 259 Seting Banner SAC aaa asang n Ud e ei pM oaks ME LL C M M ML susan DL E 260 Setting the Banner Border 2222 aa cece cece ANN a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa ee 261 Feed Explorer as oases dst cs ine edd T T 262 About the Feed Explorer Module 2 222000 2002 00000 II cece cece aaa a aaa a aa a a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 262 Manage Settings a a a a a kaaa 263 Displaying DNN Solutions in the Feed Explorer
32. Add New User link This opens the Add New User page 2 In the User Name text box enter a user name The user name cannot be changed 3 In the First Name text box enter the person s first name 4 In the Last Name text box enter the person s last name 5 Inthe Display Name text box enter the name to be displayed to other site members Note This field may not be displayed See Editing the User Account Settings 6 In the Email Address text box enter a valid email address 7 At Authorize select from the following options e Check jm the check box if the user is authorized to access the portal This will automatically pro vide access to the Registered User role and any roles set for Auto Assignment This is the default setting e Uncheck r4 the check box if the new user is not yet authorized to access the portal The Admin istrator is required to authorize this account at a later date 8 At Notify select from the following options e Check jm the check box to send a notification email to the user s email address This is the default setting e Uncheck r4the check box if you don t wish to send notification If the account is not authorized you may like to send the notification at a later time 9 To create the user s password select from these options e To generate a random password check jg the Random Password check box e To create a password manually a Uncheck m the Random Password check box b In the Password
33. Address text box enter the email address of the contact person listed above 4 OPTIONAL In the Address Details section the following optional fields are available a In the Street text box enter the street part of the Vendor s address E g 10 Main Road b In the Unit text box enter the unit number E g Unit 6 or Suite 6 etc c In the City text box enter the Vendor s city E g Melbourne d At Country select the Vendor s country CB In the Region text box enter the Region State Province of the Vendor OR select from the drop down list where available See Host 5 Lists for more details on creating regions for countries f In the Postal Code text box enter the Vendor s postal code E g 31234 In the Telephone text box enter the Vendor s telephone number E g 61 3 9421 6555 oO 98 In the Cell text box enter the Vendor s cell mobile number E g 0400 100 100 i In the Fax text box enter the Vendor s facsimile number E g 61 3 9421 6444 5 In the Other Details section the following optional field is available a In the Website text box enter the Vendor s web site address E g http www domain com 6 Click the Update link Tip Field names for address details may vary depending on the language used on the site Tip Once a new vendor is created the following additional settings will be available vendor logo author ization classifications banner advertising and affiliate referrals To complete th
34. All Containers check box to view all of the available containers 3 OPTIONAL To preview a container click on a thumbnail image where provided This displays the con tainer in a new web site browser 4 Select a container 5 Click the Next link Site Wizard Choose a Default Container for your site You can select a Container from the Container Viewer This container wil be applied ta all madules an all pages in your site However when you edit the Module properties you will have the ability to override this default container with a different one Show All Containers El DNN Gray Image DNN Gray Image DNN Gray Text Header Header Color Background Header White Background Color Background Step 5 Add Site Details Here you can enter or edit the Site Details for this site These are the default details used by search engines to index your site In the Name Title text box enter the name or title to be applied to the site This will show in visitors browser window titles In the Description text box enter description to be applied to the site This will be the description that Internet search engines will display to visitors The site must be submitted to these search engines In the KeyWords text box enter keywords to be applied to the site This will be what the Internet search engines look for if you choose to submit your site to them At Logo select or upload a logo See the Common
35. Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Host Site Module Container lt Use Page Default A Preview Cache Time secs O Enter Title Module Header Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Donec ipsum Ut molestie tincidunt diam Mulla consequat Module Footer Module Header Module Footer Setting a Module as a WebSlice How to set a module as a Web Slice A Web Slice is a snippet of information in this case the content of a module that a user can subscribe to using some web site browsers such as Internet Explorer 8 TE8 Content within Web Slices are automatically updated by IE8 and can be view directly from the Favorites toolbar 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Maximize the Page Settings section Go to the Basic Settings section At Is a WebSlice select from these options e Check m the check box to set the module as a WebSlice This displays the following settings a In the Web Slice Title text box enter a title for the Web Slice OR Leave blank to use the module title b At Web Slice Expires Enter a date when the Web Slice will expire OR Leave blank to use the End date See Working with the Calendar c In the Web Slice TTL text box enter the Time to Live TTL for this web slice in minutes OR Leave blank to
36. Click the 44 Return link to return to the Module Definitions page Install new Package Package Installation Report See below for the results of the package installation StartJob Starting Installation Info Starting Installation DNN Survey Info Starting Installation Script Info Begin Sql execution Info Folder Created C DotNetNuke ReleasesDotNetNuke 05 00 00 InstallB3 DesktopModules Survey Providers DataProviders SqlDataProvider Info Created Providers DataProviders SqlDataProvider 03 0 1 00 5qIDataProvider Info Executing 03 01 00 5qIDataProvider Info Start Sql execution 03 01 00 SqlDataProvider file Info End Sql execution 03 01 00 5glDataProvider file Info Created Providers DataProviders SqlDataProvider 03 03 00 5qlDataProvider Info Executing 03 03 00 5glDataProvider Info Start Sql execution 03 03 00 5glDataProvider file Info End Sql execution 03 03 00 5glDataPravider file Info Created Providers DataProvidersSalDataProvider 04 00 20 5qlDataProvider Info Executing 04 00 20 5qlDataProvider Info Start Sql execution 04 00 20 5glDataProvider file Info End Sql execution 04 00 20 5qIDataProvider file Info Created Providers DataProvidersSaglDataProvider 04 00 60 5qlDataProvider Info Executing 04 00 60 5qlDataProvider Info Component installed successfully File Info Installation committed Info Installation successful DMM Survey Info Deleted temporary install folder EndJob Installation
37. Document Manager which enables you to insert a doc ument link into the Editor Additional link settings are available Opens the Flash Manager which enables you to insert Flash swf into the Editor The properties tab enables you to set prop erties of the flash to be inserted Opens the Media Manager which enables you to insert media into the Editor The properties tab enables you to set properties of the media to be inserted Document Manager Ls Flash Manager 5 Media Manager 5 Tool Template Manager Save Template Hyperlink Manager CTRL K Remove Link CTRL SHIFT K Icon Description Opens the Template Manager which enables you to insert a tem plate htmtemplate into the Editor Insert a link anchor or email link Additional settings are avail able Save the content in the Editor as a new template a Removes a link from selected content also create folders as well as upload and manage files Related Topics e See Managing Allowable File Extensions Tables and Tools Toolbar The Tables and Tools toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Tool Insert Symbol Insert Table Insert Code Snippet Set Absolute Position Image Map Editor Convert to Lower Case Convert to Upper Case Module Manager Toggle Full Screen Mode F11 Track Changes About RadEditor Icon Description OPTION ONE Click the Arrow icon to open the s
38. Host Settings How to edit hosting settings including hosting space page quota user quota site log history and premium mod ules for a portal 1 3 4 5 6 Ta Navigate to Host gt Portals Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal This opens the Edit Portals page Maximize the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Host Settings section At Expiry Date click the Calendar link and select the date that hosting contract for this portal expires In the Hosting Fee text box enter the monthly hosting fee for this site In the Disk Space text box enter the available disc space in Megabytes MB allowed for this portal OR Leave this field blank for unlimited space In the Page Quota text box enter the maximum number of pages allowed for this portal Leave this field blank for unlimited pages 9 In the User Quota text box enter the maximum number of users allowed for this portal Leave this field blank for unlimited user accounts 10 In the Site Log History Days text box enter the number of days that Site Log activity is kept for this portal 11 At Premium Modules perform the following to add or remove premium modules on this site e To add a premium module to the portal 1 Click on the module name in the Available Modules list 2 Click the Add Modulez button The module is now listed in the Selected Modules list e To add all premium modules to the portal 1 Click
39. Insert Table button 3 Select for these options e To insert a basic table move your cursor to highlight the number of rows or columns for the table and then click to select it This displays the basic table in the Editor Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Table Wizard SHET ep JH gd 3 pf EX e To design a more complex table click the Table Wizard button See Setting the Table Editing a Table How to edit a table using the right click menu or the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Place your cursor inside the table Note If you want to use the drop down menu to modify the table design rather than the Table Wizard then place your cursor in the cell where you want to perform the mod ification 2 Right click This displays the drop down menu 3 Select an option to modify the rows columns or cells of the table OR Select 4 Table Properties or Cell Properties to use the Table Wizard to modify the table 4 Click the OK button Insert Row Above Insert Row Below Delete Row Insert Column to the Left Insert Column to the Fight Delete Column Merge Cells Horizontally Merge Cells Vertically Split Cell Split Cell Horizontally Delete Cell Cell Properties E5 c Table Properties diting a table Setting Table Properties How to set the optional properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Open the Table Wizard S
40. Jack has been denied per mission to edit the page This means that Jack will not be able to edit the page even if he is a member of the Page Editor role b Page Settings El Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this page El Page Details Page Name Store Page Title Buy Ecofriendly Toys Description Buy our Ecofriendly toys online today All toys and games are environmentally a friendly and manufactured using fair labor and adhering to fair trade practises Keywords toys ecofriendly eco friendly fair trade fair labour fair labor dolls handmade dolls rag dolls wooden blocks child safe organic toys organic paints plantation wa Tags Blocks Dolls Products Wooden Toys Parent Page lt None Specified Include In Menu Permissions Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators O a t t F A A A J All Users Q O L L L L L L Product Managers O v O O O L LI Registered Users O 1 O O O O O Subscribers O L L LJ L L Unauthenticated Ucar D O D D O Username I Add Copy Permissions to Descendants Copy Permissions Advanced Settings ap Update X Delete Cancel Basic page settings when adding a new page Setting Page Permissions How to set page permissions by username and roles This tutorial assumes you are on the Page Settings page of a
41. Minimized None Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Host Site Module Container lt Use Page Default Cache Time secs a Preview 5 Click the T Update link Note The below images display the same Links module with the container displayed top image and hidden bot tom image Note A border has been set for the bottom Links module Links Administrator Prafile Home Profile of our Wholistic Therapist Course Timetable Holistic Services Administrator Profile Home Profile of our Wholistic Therapist Course Timetable Holistic Services Setting Module Printing How to set the visibility of the print button This button enables users to print the module content and is typically located in the bottom right corner of a module 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 At Display Container check jy the check box to display the module container 5 At Allow Print select from the following options e Check jy the check box to display the Print button and allow printing e Uncheck p the check box to hide Print button and disallow printing lH Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module fo
42. Mongolian Traditional Mongolian PRC DEI English Australia E Arabic Jordan Li Language Settings 3 At Enable Browser Language Detection check jy the check box to enable OR Uncheck j the check box to disable Em Ladi 4 At Use Paging in Editor select from these options e Check jy the check box to enable paging which is disabled by default Use paging to reduce the size of the page a At Editor Page Size enter the number of items to be displayed on each page of the editor The default setting is 10 e Uncheck j the check box to disable paging 5 Click the M Update link Related Topics e See About the Pager Control Portal Language Settings Enable Browser Language Detection Use Paging in Editor Editor Page Size V Update Cancel Example Editing Privacy and Terms of Use Statements How to edit the Privacy statement and or the Terms of Use Statements using the Languages module No message is displayed by default See Portal Privacy Text 1 Gotoa Languages module OR Navigate to Admin Languages This displays the Culture grid which lists the available languages 2 In the Static Resources Portal column click the Edit 7 button beside the language file to be edited This displays GlobalResources Portal o resx at Selected Resource File as the files ready for editing Note This is where you will find the files most commonly desired for
43. New File Large icon Link Type File A File On Your Site O System Image File Location Root File Name lt None Specified Upload New File Page Skin Host Site lt Use Portal Default gt Preview Page Container Host O Site lt Use Portal Default A Preview Copy design to descendants Copying page and module design to child pages on the Page Settings page Copying Permissions to Descendant Pages How to copy the permissions applied to a parent page to all of its descendant child pages This applies the Per missions set for viewing and editing pages This setting is only displayed for pages with existing child pages Option One Using the Ribbonbar G ca 1 Navigate to the required parent page 2 Maximize x the Control Panel 3 Goto the Current Page tab 4 Select 7 Copy Design to Children This displays Confirm message box which reads Skin and container will be replaced for all children of this page Are you sure you want to continue 5 Click the OK button to confirm Common Tasks Current Page Marne Page Editor Include in menu skin Use Default Site Skin Update Page ettings Actions Update Current Page Option Two Using the Ribbonbar or Iconbar 1 Navigate to the required parent page 2 Maximize the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to either the Current Page or the Common Tasks tab and select 4 Edit OR On the Iconbar go the Page F
44. Save button e If there is no conflict with overwriting the message The template was saved successfully is dis played Click OK to close the window e If there is a conflict the message The following error was reported The file already exists is dis played In this situation repeat Steps 1 6 using a new File Name Save as template Folder Templates File Name Simple htmtemplate Overwrite if file exists 4 Saving a Template Banners About the Banners Module The Banners module displays vendor banner advertising Banners can be either a static or an animated image HTML or plain text as well as script such as JavaScript You can set the number of banners displayed in the mod ule as well as set a number of layout options Where more banners are available than the module is set to display at one time then different banners are displayed each time the page is visited Module Version 01 00 00 Minimum DNN Version 01 00 00 Banners Related Topics o Dedicated a AN E Xd Colocated ETE ww Servers Available dese Id DotNetNuke Done Right New plans starting at just 69 00 Introducing Virtual Enviornments MANIMUMASP Serious Microso Developers 22 easyCGl ai DotNetNuke Mpu wi P NET 2 0 Advanced Hosting Easy Solutions a Hosting Enviroument CLICK HERE e See About the Vendors Module e See Enabling Disabling Banner Advertising About Banner Types An overview of the d
45. Select a Skin for your Site Here you can select a skin to be applied to the site pages This will not override settings on individual pages To keep the current skin click the z Next link To select a new skin complete the following steps 1 To preview a skin click on the thumbnail image where provided This will display the skin in a new web site browser 2 Select a skin 3 Click the gi Next link Site Wizard Select a Skin for your Site You can select a Skin from the Skin Viewer below This skin will be applied to all pages in your site However when vou edit the Page properties you will have the ability to override this default skin with a different one DNN Blue Horizontal DNN Blue Horizontal DNN Blue Vertical Menu Fixed Width Menu Full Width Menu Fixed Widt DNN Blue Vertical DNN Gray Horzontal DNN Gray Horizontal Menu Full Width Menu Fxed Width Menu Full Width a Previous Step 4 Choose a Default Container for your site Here you can select the default containers that will be applied to the module on the site This will not override set tings on individual modules To keep the current container click the s Next link To select a new default container follow the steps below 1 If you selected a skin at Step 3 the matching containers will be displayed and the default container will be selected by default 2 OPTIONAL Check the Show
46. Sent Successfully message is displayed e If the test is not successful a message describing the error is displayed Tip If you used the web config workaround to send emails without a SMTP server look in the folder specified for the eml file FH SMTP Server Settings KA SMTP Server and port smtp dotnetnuke com 587 t SMTP Authentication O Anonymous Basic NTLM SMTP Enable SSL f SMTP Username MyUsername TA SMTP Password 5554228255 Other Settings Setting the Site Log Storage How to set the storage location for the site log The Log file can be stored in one of two methods 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 At Site Log Storage select from the following options e Database Stores the Site Log data in the DNN Database e File System Stores the Site Log data in the default directory under the portals subdirectory 5 Click the T Update link FH Other Settings t Control Panel ICONBAR f Site Log Storage Database File System Setting the Site Log Buffer This setting controls the Site Log Buffer for all new sites The Site Log Buffer exists to allow Site Log Events e g Logins Navigation etc to be collected into a buffer before being sent to the database By default this is set at 1 item which means that the buffer will be sent to the database when it has one event in it For example if the Site Lo
47. Tools gt Link Control for more details Click the 45 Finish link A message reading If you changed the skin for your site it should change when you leave this page is displayed Click on the Home page to view any skin or module changes and to view any new pages or modules added using a template T aw Site Wizard Add Site Details On this page you can provide some basic information about your site You can optionally provide a Description and Keywords that help describe your site These are used by search engines together with the site s name to help identify and index your site The keywords need to be separated by commas Some skins support a Logo usually in the top left hand corner If you are using a skin that supports logos you can choose it on this page If the file you would like is not on this site you can upload one from your lacal computer Name Title Remedial Massage Website v Description Providing the latest news research and more on remedial massage including deep tissue massage and sports massage KeyWords massage sports massage Australia Melbourne health wellbeing remedial massage Logo File Location Root File Name logo gir Upload New File a Previous inal page of the Site Wizard Working with the Control Panel About the DNN Control Panels DNN includes two Control Panels the RibbonBar DNN Professional Edition only and the Iconbar which ena ble the Host SuperUse
48. aaa aaa 205 Deleting a AA 206 Editing a WOkTIOW State coii b a A a E EE d ge a a ES IAN SA DILL NG b a a ELI 206 Enabling Disabling Token Replacement aaa 20 0 2 2 ccc ccc cece cece a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 207 Setting a Workflow as Default for Site 207 Sentina VV OL OWN seh te ee i d a LA RUE ELA UU aa tO Sac Na LU UE Ds SM aa 208 END Gin ka ai A AA habe nde tee anos a atte Ora KANG ed AAN KN nanan sans AGUA geen 209 ADOUCIR KH Yah O AA KA saad KA AA AA A DM naka dace ie E IE IC UD tases 209 Check Spelin essri ae baana a a aa hang a Pa NAG a BG AG ae ga ALNG e aa 210 Pormatung Code BIOGR ii is a GENG A ene a A ein AE aa A neue KE a I NALANG NA DAG KAU a b aga 211 Modifying Editor Size aaa aa a kaaa 214 Using the Resource Manager a 215 Viewing Word and Character Co0ount aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 217 AK AG 218 AcHons OO AT 218 Color and CSS di AA 219 Fonts and Font Size Toolbar 2 2 20 20 0 a a a a aa a a aa a a aaa aaa aaa 220 Pormang ToOOIDdE aaa anana saja Ena aaa a Saradan E BE DEE NA AL Na an a E a a EUR E aa eee eee 220 ovs ia a AA AA 221 Resources OO Dar P M R 221 Tables and Tools Toolbar 200 2200 c cece ccc cece cece c cece a a aa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa 222 Managing Images and Media 2 0 cece cece ce a cece eee ce cece eee a aaa a aaa aaa aaa aaa 223 ISENG Bare n T 225 Setting Document Properties aa
49. all emails have been sent For Asynchronous send action the message displays once the send action has successfully commenced Newsletters a Basic Settings In this section you can set up required sender and recipients as well as subject for your message D Addressees User Role s Filter By Group lt Global Roles gt Administrators E Newsetter Registered Users E Subscribers F Additional Emails julie smith domain com wang chung domain com au From lorraine young domain com Reply To campaigns domain com Subject Remidial Massage Centre Newsletter No 1 a Message You can use the Editor below to write your message Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor E Souce E A palay ela ala B Z U abe x sakan d ara E 8 OG j Style o Format MN aji Font ira Ejse j 4 vae Dear User FirstName User LastName Welcome to the first newsletter for the Portal Portal Name What is our aim Portal Description This month we have a number of great new offers to whet your appetite Including 20 off Remedial Massage for all out subscribers Click here for details of this and other special subscriber offers Show custom editor options Refresh Editor a Advanced Settings In this section you can set up the advanced settings for your message Attachment File Location Documents File Name Yoga
50. and select the required template See Using the Resource Manager 4 Click the Insert button Template Manager Upload Introduction Filename F Documents Insert your introductory summary here Exports F Exports E Gallery Gallery H f Column 1 Column 2 imane E Images Sample data Sample data F Media Sample Sample Mecha u data data F Templates Template i Simple htmtemplate Conclusion insert your conclusion here m ma b Page 1 of 1 Items Ito af Saving a Template How to create and save a template using the RADEditor 1 Create your template by adding text images tables etc as desired Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Introduction Insert your introductory summary here Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Conclusion insert your conclusion here Design 49 HTML Words 39 Characters MB 2 Click the Save Template button This opens the Save As Template window 3 At Folder select the File Manager folder where you want to save this template 4 In the File Name text box enter a name for this template 5 At Overwrite If File Exists check m the check box to overwrite any template that exists with this tem plate OR Uncheck r4 the check box if you don t want to override an existing file This enables warning message if a template with this name already exists 6 Click the
51. b In the Last Name text box enter the Administrator s last name c In the User Name text box enter a user name for the Administrator d In the Password text box enter a password for the Administrator e In the Confirm Password text box re enter the password for the Administrator f In the Email Address text box enter the Administrator s email address 2 In the Portal Properties section complete these details a In the Portal Title text box enter a title for the portal b At Template select a template for the portal 3 Click the Next s nja button EY DOTNETNUKE C COMMUNITY 4 Portal Title In this page you will configure the Host or initial Portal website You will need to provide an administrator user account This user has access to all functionality of the portal and as with the Host User care should be taken to provide a UserName Password combination that is difficult to hack by malicious users Portal Administrator First Name Administrator Last Name Account User Name admin Password IIIIIII Confirm Password IIIIIII Email Address admin ecozany com Portal Properties Portal Title My Website Template Default Website Step Twelve Congratulations 1 Click the Finished Go to Site Finished Goto site button to go to the newly installed portal r DOTNEeTNUKE ag COMMUNITY Conqratulations Congratulations you have successfully installed DotNetNuke Finished Goto Sit
52. banner See About the Link Control section for more details on setting links e In the Text Script text box enter the text of the banner HTML formatting can be used 6 The following additional settings are available a At URL select one of the following options e Select URL A Link To An External Resource and leave the text box empty This sets the link to the Vendor s web site e Select URL A Link To An External Resource and enter the URL users go to when they click on the banner name This URL also displays at the bottom of the banner e Select Page A Page On Your Site and select the page users go to when they click on the banner name The page number is also displayed at the bottom of the banner E g 85 e Select File A File On Your Site and select the file the user go to when they click on the banner name The file ID number is also displayed at the bottom of the banner E g FileID 148 b In the CPM Cost text box enter the cost per 1000 Impressions or the once off cost E g For every 1000 impressions of the banner the vendor will charge the listed amount Alternatively the Vendor may charge a flat fee for banner advertising c In the Impressions text box enter the number of impressions the banner will display for d At Start Date click the Calendar link and select the first date the banner is displayed e At End Date click the Calendar link and select the last date the banner is displayed f At Criteria
53. button to proceed C DotNetNukeModules Core Modules Announcements 2 Mext A Return 4 On the Package Information page a Review the information about this package b Click the s Next link Install new Package Package Information The following information was found in the package manifest Name DNN_ Announcements Type Madule Friendly Name Announcements Description This module renders a list of announcements Each announcement includes title i text and a read more link Version 4 0 1 Owner Organization Urt Email Address E Next a Return 5 On the Release Notes page a Review the release notes for this package b Click the s Next link Install new Package Release Notes You can review the Release Notes for this package Release Notes Gi Next Return 6 On the Review License page a Review the license for this package b OPTIONAL If available check the Accept Terms check box to accept the license terms of this pack age c Click the z Next link Install new Package Review License Before proceeding you must accept the terms of the license for this extension Please review the license and check the checkbox marked Accept Terms cense This package has na license 7 On the Package Installation Report page a Review the results of the package installation which details the success or failure of the upload 8
54. c In the Middle Name text box enter the first name E g Angela d In the Last Name text box enter the first name E g Smith e In the Suffix text box enter a suffix for the name E g MD f In the Unit text box enter a unit number E g Flat 2 g In the Street text box enter the street address E g 101 Blackburn Road h In the City text box enter the city E g New York i In the Region text box enter select the region E g New York j At Country select a country from the drop down box k In the Postal Code text box enter select the postal code E g 11111 l In the Telephone text box enter your telephone number m In the Cell Mobile text box enter your mobile number n In the Fax text box enter your facsimile number o In the Website text box enter your web site URL E g www domain com p In the IM text box enter you instant messenger id E g EASmith domain com q At Photo select upload or remove a photo or image for your profile See Managing your Profile Photo r In the Biography Editor enter a biography s At Time Zone select a time zone from the drop down box t At Preferred Locale select the name of your locale from the drop down box i Select one of these options Display English Name select to display your locale in English E g Italy e Display Native Name Select to display the native spelling of your locale E g Italia 6 Click the 45 Update link Tip The list of available languages are managed
55. can apply to become a site member This creates a user account for them however access to the Registered User role is restricted until the account is authorized See Authorizing An Unauthorized User Note The Primary Administrator receives email notification of each new registration e Public Registering visitors gain immediate access to the Registered User security role e Verified Access to the Registered User role is conditional on the user verifying their account by entering a verification code the first time they log in to the site The verification code is emailed to them in a welcome email when they register thereby verifying the user s email address 6 Click the T Update link E Security Settings CS None DO Private Public verified Adding a User Account Hoe to add new users to the site using the User Accounts module Tip Fields marked with a Required gs icon are mandatory Tip Usernames are unique a new user cannot be added with an existing Username When this occurs the fol lowing message will be displayed below the registration fields upon clicking update A User Already Exists For the Username Specified Please Register Again Using A Different Username You will be required to modify the User Name Your portal may also be set to require unique passwords Where this is the case you will receive a similar warning message 1 Select es Add New User from the User Accounts module menu OR Click the ells
56. clicked the upload button If there aren t any folders listed in the drop down box this means the Administrator has not given you access to upload files Click the iy Upload File link _ Upload File Portal Root C DotNethuke Releases DotNetNuke 04 06 00 Install BETA1 Portals 0 CA lmages Businessman gif Decompress ZIP Files A Return Uploading a single file Related Topics e See Uploading Multiple Files Uploading Multiple Files How to upload multiple files to the site using the File Manager module Files must be zipped compressed on your computer before you begin this tutorial Tip An Administrator must grant you access to upload images to one or more folders Assigning Folder Per missions by Role or Assigning Folder Permission to a User 1 Click the sy Upload button 2 Click the Browse button and select a file 3 At the drop down box select the folder which the files will be uploaded to The default folder is the folder that was selected when you clicked the upload button If there aren t any folders listed in the drop down box this means the Administrator has not given you access to upload files 4 At Decompress ZIP Files select from the following options e Check jy the check box to decompress the files while uploading them This adds both the ZIP file and all the individual files to the selected folder e Uncheck p the check box to upload the file as a zipped folder You can un
57. color name or hex number E g Navy or CFCFCF Find Color code charts at http www w3schools com Html html colors asp Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type None File A File On Your Site e System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified lightgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None v Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Module Container HIS G lt Use Page Default Preview Cache Time secs 5 Click the amp Update link Links Administrator Profile Home Profile of our Wholistic Therapist Course Timetable Holistic Services Setting Module Border Width How to set the border width on a module 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 In the Border text box enter a number to set the width of the border in pixels E g 1 1 pixel width Leave this field blank for no border lH Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type
58. editing such as portal and email messages CI Lanquage Management a O DotNetNuke s security model requires that host users must create new languages As a site administrator you can manage existing languages If you would like more languages please contact the Host User for your site System Default m English United States Site Default English United States id v Update Native Name English Name The default site language cannot be disabled OD Essble Localized Content Static Resources Culture di Site English United States pP P P P Swedish Sweden G m E Mongolian Traditional Mongolian PRC a Es English Australia 3 EZ Arabic Jordan Language Settings Find Resource Name MESSAGE PORTAL PRIVACY Text or MESSAGE PORTAL TERMS Text as desired Note If Paging is enabled then it may be located on a subsequent page See Con figuring the Portal Language Settings To edit the message perform one of the following options e Edit the message body using HTML tags in the Localized Value text box below OR e Click the Edit button This displays dialog box which reads All unsaved changes will be lost if you continue Are you sure you want to continue 1 Click the OK button ii Enter your new message into the RTE ensuring you include the replacement tokens displayed at Default Value iii Click the Update link to return to the Language Editor OPT
59. either Before to the left of or After to the right of the page name selected in the second drop down box This adds the page on the same level in the menu e Select to add the page as a Child Of the page name selected in the second drop down box 8 Click the Add Page button 9 Go to Admin Pages or to a Tabs module 10 Select the new page and click the Edit Selected Page button 11 At Permissions grant All Users permission to View the page 12 Click the Update link Mode View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE Common Tasks Name Profile Add Module Ix li e New mplate LIserProfile E eti i g Insert After Home Add Page Insert Page Adding a User Protile Page using the RibbonBar Manage Pages Viewing Any Page How to view any page within a site including those which are not included in the menu e Option One If the page is visible included in the menu then navigate to the page using the site menu e Option Two If the page is hidden not included in the menu click on a link to the hidden page Author ized users can create a page link using the Links module e Option Three See Viewing any Page Tabs Module Moving Page Location How to move a page to a new location on the site menu Admin Tip Additional options are available to Administrators See Moving Page Position in Menu 1 Go to the required page See Viewing Any Page 2 Maximize x the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonB
60. enter the maximum number of banners to be displayed at one time The following optional settings control how the banners displays in the module a At Orientation select Vertical or Horizontal to set how the banners are displayed in the mod ule Vertical is the default setting b In the Border Width text box enter a number to set the border width pixels OR Enter 0 zero for no border No border is the default setting c In the Border Color text box enter a color for the border E g DarkOrange Border Width must be set to enable this setting See Reference Color Codes and Names for more details Note A Bor der Width must be set for this field to work d In the Cell Padding text box enter a number to set the space between banners and the border Border Width must be set to enable this setting e In the Row Height text box enter a number to set the height for each banner cell pixels f In the Row Width text box enter a number to set the pixel width for each banner cell 6 In the Banner Click Through URL text box enter an redirect page which applies to all banners in this module 7 Click the Update link i Edit Banner t Banner Source 3 Host Site Banner Type Button Banner Group Premium Banner Count v Orientation Vertical Horizontal Border Width g Border Color CornflowerBlue t Cell Padding 4 Row Height 100 Row Width 250 Banner Click http
61. f Use Custom Error Messages t Host Skin TA Host Container DNN Blue Image Header White Backgr YAN Preview Host Site DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width N Preview t Edit Skin Host Site DNN Blue Image Header White Backgn T4 Preview TA Edit Container LI Upload Skin LI Upload Container Setting the Edit Container How to set the default container applied to modules on the edit pages of all portals within this DNN installation This setting can be overridden by Administrators via their Admin Site Settings page 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Go to the Basic Settings Appearance section 3 OPTIONAL To upload a new container Uploading Installing a Host Container 4 At Edit Container complete the following a Select one of the following container directories e Select Host to displays all containers uploaded to Host gt Skins e Select Site to displays all containers stored on the Admin gt Extensions page of the current por tal b Select a container from the drop down box 5 OPTIONAL Click the 6 Preview link to preview the container This displays the current portal in a new browser with the selected container applied 6 Click the T Update link E Appearance f Show Copyright Credits f Use Custom Error Messages Host Site t Host Skin DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width A Preview Host Site Host Container m Q
62. filter the files using the File Manager module This will display only files which match the entered criteria and which are in the selected folder The filter is applied to both the file name and the file extension Tip You must remove the filter to view all files again Do this by deleting the filter criteria from the text box and clicking the Filter button 1 Navigate to and select the required folder 2 On the Files Toolbar enter the filter criteria into the text box 3 Click the Filter button All files containing the filter criteria are displayed in the Files Window 4 OPTIONAL Navigate to and select other folders to see the filter applied to those folders T E3 Move Files Upload Moelete Files A D ll File Name Date Size 4 are Eve 300x170px jpg 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM A 25 1127 Hj ico fbirg 2 6 2007 4 40 17 PM A 575 X iltering files Reordering Files How to reorder all files within a folder of the File Manager module Files can be reordered by file name date or size 1 In the Title Bar of the File List Window click on title you want to reorder files by I e File Name Date or Size FI i BeachJog 100x56px uif 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM Ej BeachJog 300x170px gif 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM HA Boxer 300x170px jpg 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM cT clipart zip 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM Ej Consultation 100x56px gif 9 6 2007 4 40 17 PM Reordering files Refreshing Files How to refresh the files within a selected folder on
63. in the File Manager module Tip You must have permission to write to both folders to perform this task 1 Navigate to and select the folder where the files are located 2 Check jg the check box beside each of the files to be moved 3 Click the 2 gt Move Files button A dialog box asking Move Checked Files is displayed 4 E 6 Click the OK button This displays a list of the selected files Moving Files BeachJog 100x56px gif BeachJog 300x170px gif From Folder Portal Root clipart To Folder Select Destination Folder from Folder Explorer Navigate to and select the folder where the files will be moved to The name of the selected folder is dis played You are able to reselect a different folder at this step if required Move Selected Files To Portal RootiDocuments Ok Cancel Click the Ok button Uploading a Single File How to upload a single file to the File Manager module These files can then be viewed on pages or linked to using various modules such as Links Documents HTML Pro and User Defined Table Tip An Administrator must grant you access to upload images to one or more folders Assigning Folder Per missions by Role or Assigning Folder Permission to a User 1 2 Click the sy Upload button Click the Browse button and select a file At the drop down box select the folder which the file will be uploaded to The default folder is the folder that was selected when you
64. in the web co nfig file NET Framework The NET Framework version which this DNN installation is running on This is specified through IIS e If the current Framework is not being used the Update Site to current Framework is displayed ASP NET Identity The Windows user account under which this DNN installation is running This account requires folder permissions on the server Server Name The Name of the Server IP Address The IP Address of the Server Permissions Code Access Security is used to minimize the attack surface however some aspects of DotNetNuke need different permissions to fulfill their tasks When retrieving data from the database Reflection is needed and when accessing outside web sites such as with the News feed module Web Permission is needed Relative Path If the portal is in a virtual directory the relative path from the root is displayed here as shown below The site this image was taken from was running on Vista Ultimate IIS 7 as a Virtual Directory e Physical Path The physical path is the path to the root of the portal This is the Server MapPath result e Server Time Displays the current date and time of the web server e GUID The GUID Global Unique Identifier is a unique identifier that can be used by module devel opers to create unique licenses per portal e Is Web Farm If this check box is checked mm then this DNN installation is running in a web farm configuration This setting can be e
65. messages 2 You have successfully subscribed to the Service Name role You have been successfully added to the role s associated with the RSVP Code entered In order to get access to the new services you will need to Logout and then Login to the site again 7 Logout and then Login to the site to gain access to the new services Tip Where a fee is charged for the service you will be redirected to the payment web site to complete the pay ment process gt Manage Profile gt Manage User Credentials s Manage Password u Manage Profile A This section allows you to manage your subscriptions on the site Some services may require payment If this is the case you will be redirected to a payment site When you return to this site you can check back here to view your subscription Service Trial Expiry Name Description Fee Fee Date Subscribe to our monthly newsletter for details of our latest products special discounts and exciting competitions Free Free Subscribe Newsletter Unsubscribe Subscribers A public role for portal subscriptions Free Free If you have been given a special RSVP code you can subscribe to these Services by entering the code in the RSVP Code field below and clicking the Subscribe button next to the field RSVP Code News Subscribe subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Code Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Link How to subscribe to a members service using an RSVP link provided by an Admi
66. module the content in the other module also updates Important You cannot add an existing module to the page where it already exists Tip You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add a module to a page 1 PA Maximize x the Control Panel Select the Common Tasks tab and at Add Module select Existing At Page select the page where the existing module is located At Module select the module to be added Note Selecting the module here appends either with content or without content to the Copy Module field below depending on whether the selected module supports copying of content OPTIONAL At Visibility select from the following options e Same As Page This sets the module as visible to all roles users who can view this page This is the default setting e Page Editors Only The sets module as only visible only to the roles user who can edit this page Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module 6 OPTIONAL At Pane select the pane you want to insert the module into The module is added to the Con tent Pane by default The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page If you select a pane other than the Content Pane the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page 7 OPTIONAL At Insert select the placement of the module from the first drop down box One or more of the fo
67. paid to the vendor when a visitor becomes a member of your site 9 Click the Update link Edit Affiliate Start Date 2 1 2007 Calendar End Date 2 30 2007 Calendar f Cost Per Click CPC 0 01 t Cost Per Acquisition CPA 1 00 Optional Cancel Send Notification Adding an affiliate accoun Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Sending Notification of Affiliate Referral Account How to send an affiliate report email to an affiliate using the Vendors module The report provides details of the site they have been made an affiliate of and the URL link to be used 1 2 Locate the required vendor account by selecting a filter or by doing a search Click the Edit gt button beside the required vendor account This opens the Edit Vendors page Maximize the Affiliate Referrals section This displays any affiliate referral accounts associated with this vendor Click the Edit button beside the required record Click the Send Notification link Click the Cancel link to return to the Edit Vendors page Edit Affiliate Start Date 2 1 2007 Calendar End Date 2 30 2007 Calendar Cost Per Click CPC 0 01 Cost Per Acquisition CPA 1 0 Optional Update Cancel Delete Send Notification c ESL EE Sending Newsletters To Site Members About the Newsletters Module The Newsletters module enables all users who are authorized to view the module to
68. permissions can export the page Import Users with Import permissions can import a page Manage Settings Users with Manage Settings permissions can change the page settings Users can edit all of the settings on the Settings page except for the permissions section which will not be visible Navigate Users with Navigate permissions can view a page in the navigation menu Users can have this permission without view permissions in which case they will not be able to view any content on the page but the page will be visible in the menu Full Control Users with Full Control permissions have full administrative rights for the page This per mission is the same as the Edit Page permission in the Community Edition Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators 7 A All Users Bloggers Chat Members EditUser Forum Admin qe qe ej amp ej Forum Member Global Moderator Module Editor Newsletter Page Editor Registered Users Unauthenticated Users 3 o o o o o o o o o o o o Oooo ooooooooos g0Uonumuumnenoneuunmne o0 ODOON DODN ODNS o0 DODODN DODDDODDO g0Uonumumueguoaumuummg 0 0000601000000 o0 00000000000 Oooooooooood 0 o00000000000 Username ale Add Copy Permissions to Descendants rage Fermissions 1n DNN Frofessiona arion Community Edition Permission
69. pse Expand ra Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title Web Slice Expires Web Slice TTL Module Container Cache Time secs etang the module icon Administrator background DNNangel com Link Type 9 None File A File On Your Site O System Image Left Center Right Not Specified lightgray Maximized Minimized None Sl ss IS MyWebslice 7 31 2010 Calendar 10 Host Site lt Use Page Default A Preview Host Tip System icons are stored in the Images folder of your DotNetNuke Installation Tip Select None Specified at File Name to remove the icon Setting Container Visibility How to set the visibility of a container 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 At Display Container select from the following options e Check jm the check box to display the module container e Uncheck E the check box to hide the module container O Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page D Basic Settings Icon Link Type 9 None File A File On Your Site System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color lightgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized
70. role overrides other settings e j Permission Denied Permission to delete the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified 16 Click the T Update link Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt mi Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators KA 3 All Users Bloggers Chat Members EditUser Forum Admin qe qe O 9 ej e wi Forum Member Global Moderator Module Editor Newsletter Page Editor Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users 3 o o o o o o o o o o o o Oooo ooooooooos Oooooo ocoo0 coo Oooooon o0oo0 coo Ooooon ocoooo do Oooooon ocoooo od Ooooo coooogd o0 00000000000 o0 o00000000000 0 o00000000000 Username ale Add Copy Permissions to Descendants Copy Permissions rage Fermissions ain DNN Froressiona auon Setting Advanced Settings for New Pages An overview of the advanced settings for new pages All advanced page settings are optional This tutorial assumes you are in the process of adding a new page or editing an existing page See Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page or Editing Page Settings 1 Maximize the Advanced Settings section 2 In the Appearance section complete any of the following optional settings a At Icon select an image to be displayed beside the page name in the menu This is also used as the Small Ico
71. select one of the following options e And Banner only expires if both the Impressions and the End Date has been met I e The banner has reached its number of clicks AND a banner has expired e Or Banner expires if either the Impressions or the End Date has been met I e The banner has reached its number of clicks OR the banner has expired 7 Click the Update link Edit Banner Banner Name Banner Type Banner Group wa ImagejLink Width Height Text Script URL 9 CPM Cost wa Impressions Start Date End Date Criteria AddINg a text banner DotNetNuke Text Link Type URL CA Link To An External Resource File A File On Your Site File Location Root 7 File Name lt None Specified ba Upload New File Content Management in a Flash lt BR gt a lt b gt DotNetNuke lt b gt is free it s open source lt br gt and it s great fun to use lt BR gt lt font color hlie gt Get DNN todavl lt font gt m Link Type URL A Link To An External Resource O Page A Page On Your Site O File A File On Your Site Location Enter The Address Of The Link http www dotnetnuke com Select An Existing URL 0 0 OR AND Update Cancel Banners DotNetNuke Content Management in a Flash DotNetNuke is free it s open source and it s great fun to use Get DIIN today www dotnetnuke com o
72. send bulk emails to all users belonging to one or more security roles and or to one or more email addresses The module sends the newsletter to each recipient separately to prevent recipients learning each other s details Newsletters can be either plain text or HTML format Files and images can be attached to the email and replacement TOKENS can be included Once an email is sent the Administrator will receive an email titled Bulk Email Report for Newsletter Subject containing the following details The date and time when the bulk email operation commenced Number of Email Recipients Number of Email Messages The date and time when the bulk email operation was completed Newsletters a Basic Settings In this section you can set up required sender and recipients as well as subject for your message Fl Addressees Registered Users User Role s Filter By Group x Global Roles gt Administrators EditUser News etter Page Editor Subscribers Additional Emails p From lorraine young dotnetnuke com t Reply To Subject a Message You can use the Editor below to write your message Basic Text Box amp Rich Text Editor E Source Wy BB Ji X 2s A3 3 7 Ak B ev zd I U me x x IDE Bel SS Seles hb ense Ca 9707 73 Show custom editor options Refresh Editor Advanced Settings Send Email Preview Email The Newsletters module Sending a Basic Newsletter How to send a ne
73. t Portal Container a DNN Blue Image Header White Backgraunt Preview Host Sit Edit Skin a amp Extropy portal ys Preview t Edit Container Extropy basic table C Preview Module Container Settings Setting a Module Icon How to display an icon on a module The icon can be any common image type such as a JPEG or GIF The icon is typically displayed to the left of the module title IMPORTANT The Display Container setting must be checked to enable this function If it is not the Icon cannot be viewed Tip The icon image is only displayed if the container applied to the module includes the ICON skin token 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Maximize _ the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 At Display Container check jy the check box to display the module container 5 At Icon select from the following options e None Select for no icon e Link Type Select to choose an image which is located in your site s File Manager See Setting a File Link or Uploading a File and Linking to the File e System Image Select to choose an icon which is part of your DotNetNuke application 6 Click the Update link Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page Basic Settings Icon wa Alignment Color Border Colla
74. the Copy Page section complete the following fields a At Copy From Page select the page be copied b At Specify Modules complete the following steps for each module c To copy a module i In the module title text box enter a new module title if required ii Select one of the following options 1 New This will add the module without any content 2 Copy This will add the module with an independent copy of the module content Mod ifying copied content doesn t update the content of the original module Note This option will be disabled for modules which don t have content which can be copied such as the Feedback and Account Login modules 3 Reference This will add the module with a referenced version of the copied content Modifying referenced content updates both copies of the module d To NOT copy a module a Uncheck r4 the check box beside any module you do NOT want copy 7 In the Localization section select the required option See Localization Settings for New Pages 8 OPTIONAL Complete the advanced page settings as required Setting Advanced Settings for New Pages 9 Click the 45 Update link You are now taken to the new page FH Copy Page Copy From Page Home t Specify Modules Welcome RightPane New Reference About Us BottomPane O New Reference Feedback ContentPane New Reference Sponsors BottomPane O New Reference ContentPane New 9 Reference Copying De
75. the File Manager module This refreshes the file information in the database 1 Navigate to and select the required folder 2 Click the E Refresh button to refresh files File Manager Standard File System Portal Root GIF Archives BeachJog_ 300x171 banners Eri Boxer 300x170px T clipart zip Copying Files How to copy one or more files to another folder of the File Manager module 1 Navigate to and select the folder where the files to be copied are located 2 Check j the check box beside each of the files to be copied or click the Select All gj button to select all of the files displayed in the Files Window 3 Click the Copy Files button A dialog box asking Copy Checked Files is displayed 4 Click the Ok button to confirm A list of the copied files is displayed and you will be asked to Select Des tination Folder from the Folder Explorer Copying Files BeachJog 100x56px gif BeachJog 300x170px gif From Folder Portal Root clipart To Folder Select Destination Folder from Folder Explorer Cancel 5 Navigate to and select the folder you want to copy the files to The name of the selected folder is displayed You are able to reselect a different folder at this step if required 6 Click the Ok button Copy Selected Files To Portal Root Medial ok Cancel ompletng file copying Moving Files How to move selected files from one folder to another
76. the user to the role without notifying them 7 Click the ap Update User Role link 8 Click Cancel to return to the User Accounts page Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Deleting a User from a Security Role How to delete a user from a security role using the User Accounts module 1 2 3 Locate the required user using a filter or by performing a search Click the Manage Roles 4 button beside the required user account At Send Notification select from the following options e Check jg the check box to send a notification email to the user informing them that they have been removed from the role This is the default setting e Uncheck r4 the check box to delete role access without sending a notification email Click the Delete lt button beside the role the user is to be deleted from This displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item Click OK to confirm deletion Repeat Steps 5 6 to delete this user from additional roles Click 44 Cancel to return to the User Accounts page T z Edit User Accounts 12 Mana je User Credentials UB Manage Roles for this Use ag Manage Password manage Profile Manage Roles for User Donald Secu rity Role O Effective Date wa Expiry Date Marketing Windows Internet Explorer s Add Role Send Notification E Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item Expiry Date Subscribers x Marketing add New User manage P
77. tip to be displayed when a user mouses over this link OPTIONAL At CSS Class select a class for the link OR Select Clear Class to use the default class Click the OK button Editing a Link How to edit a link in the RADeditor 1 Select the linked text or object 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K button This opens the Hyperlink Manager 3 Edit the link as required 4 Click the OK button Deleting a Link How to delete a link from the RADEditor 1 Select the linked text or object 2 Click the Remove Link CTRL SHIFT K 4 Creating an Anchor How to create an anchor using the RADEditor 1 Highlight the text object for the anchor Place you cursor where you want to insert the anchor 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K button This opens the Hyperlink Manager 3 Go to the Anchor tab 4 In the Name text box enter an anchor name 5 Click the OK button Editing an Anchor How to edit an anchor in the RADeditor OPTION ONE Use this option when the anchor has been created by first selecting text or an object 1 Select the anchored text or object 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K button This opens the Hyperlink Manager 3 Edit the anchor as required 4 Click the OK button OPTION TWO Use this option when the anchor has been added to the editor by placing the cursor in a loca tion 1 Select the HTML tab 2 Locate the anchor HTML which will look something like lt a name an
78. to set the time zone for this site This sets all time related information on this site including the default set ting for the CurrentDate skin object l Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site WG from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Maximize the Advanced Settings section 4 Maximize the Other Settings section 5 At Portal TimeZone select the time zone for this site 6 Click the po Update link a Other Settings Administrator Administrator Account Default Language English United States Portal TimeZone UTC 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tjuana Using the Site Wizard Step 1 Site Configuration Wizard This page provides an introduction to the Site Wizard Have a read and then click the s Next link Site Wizard Site Configuration Wizard The Site Configuration Wizard provides an Administrator with a User Friendly way to set up the more common features of a Portal You can step through the Wizard using the Next Back buttons at the bottom of the Wizard Page Once enough detail has been collected to complete the Wizard the Finish Button will be enabled B Next Step 2 Choose a Template for your site This step enables you to choose a site template Templates contain pages with modules which may or may not include content To
79. to the Basic Settings section At Display Container check ga the check box to display the module container At Allow Syndicate select from the following options e Check py the check box to display the RSS EM button and allow syndication e Uncheck r4 the check box to hide RSS button and disallow syndication lH Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type 9 None 2 File A File On Your Site System Image vs Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color lightgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None vs Display Container Allow Print Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Host Site Module Container G lt Use Page Default Preview Cache Time secs O 6 Click the amp Update link Fnter Title gi amp Edit Text amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere porta 4 Help Online Help ox Print Syndicating content
80. unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e Jj Permission Granted Users can import the module e j Permission Denied Users cannot import the module unless Full Control is granted 13 In the Manage Settings column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the cor rect permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot manage module settings unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e 3 Permission Granted Users can manage module settings e j Permission Denied Users cannot manage module settings unless Full Control is granted 14 In the Full Control or Edit Module column click on the check box beside a role username repeat edly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available e Not Specified Permissions are not specified e 7 Permission Granted Users have full control to view the module manage module content and manage module settings Note In DNN Community Edition View Module permissions must also be granted e 9 Permission Denied Users are denied full control 15 Click the Update link Tip When setting Permissions you can change the selection at Filter By Group and set permissions for any of the related roles before updat
81. use the default to the cache time converted as minutes e Uncheck F the check box to set the module as not a WebSlice 5 Click the M Update link YA Tz a WebSlice 7j Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Y Web Slice TTL 10 etting a Module as a WebSlice Overriding the Default Container How to set a module container which will override the default container set for the site 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Maximize _ the Page Settings section 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 At Module Container select from the following to view the associated containers e Host Populates the drop down box with a list of all module containers uploaded by the Host These containers are available to all sites e Site Populates the drop down box with a list of the module containers with are available to this site 5 Select a module container from the drop down list 6 OPTIONAL Click the Preview link to view the container applied to the module If this option is selected you will need to repeat the above steps again 7 Click the T Update link O Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type 9 None File A File On Your Site System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color ligh
82. using the Languages module gt Manage Profile u Manage User Credentials ea Manage Password u Manage Prafile ta Manage Services Prefix First Name Middle Name 9 Last Name Suffix Unit Street City Region Country Postal Code Telephone Cell Mobile Fax Website IM Photo e Biography amp Time Zone amp Preferred Locale MS Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Rose st Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only J Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Booth Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only 35 o Visibility Public Members Only amp Admin Only Tottenham Road Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only California Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only California x ates Visibility Public Members Only amp Admin Only Visibility Public Members Only amp Admin Only tes Visibility Public Members Only amp Admin Only Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Visibility Public Members Only amp Admin Only WWW ecozany com Visibility Public O Members Only Admin Only rose ecozany com Visibility Public Members Only Admin Only Visibility Public amp Members Only Admin Only
83. which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 2 Go to the Basic Settings Site Details section 4 In the Description text box enter a description for this site 5 Click the iy Update link g Site Details amp 9 Title My Website Description My Website is a sample health and wellbeing website a with the latest news and techniques in western and eastern medicines and health practises including Displaying the Site Title in the Copyright Notice How to set the copyright notice for the site to automatically display the current year and the site title This tuto rial explains how to display the Site Title and a copyright notice for the current year E g If the title of your site is My Web site leave the field blank to display Copyright c 2009 My Web site If the Title field is blank the copyright notice will display the text Copyright c 2009 The copyright notice displays on pages where the applied skin contains the COPYRIGHT skin object In the default DNN skin the copyright notice appears at the bottom each page I Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site we from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings Site Details section 4 In the Copyright text box leave the field blank 5 Click the iy Update lin
84. 00 19 036 Cleaning Up Files 05 01 04 Success 00 00 19 036 Cleaning Up Files 05 02 00 Success 00 00 19 036 Cleaning Up Files 05 02 01 Success 00 00 19 036 Cleaning Up Files 05 02 02 Success 00 00 19 036 Cleaning Up Files 05 02 03 Success 00 00 19 037 Updating Config Files 05 00 01 Success 00 00 19 040 Updating Config Files 05 01 00 Success 00 00 19 108 Updating Config Files 05 01 01 Success 00 00 19 108 Updating Config Files 05 01 02 Success 00 00 19 109 Updating Config Files 05 01 03 Success 00 00 19 109 Updating Config Files 05 01 04 Success 00 00 19 109 Updating Config Files 05 02 00 Success 00 00 19 143 Updating Config Files 05 02 01 Success 00 00 19 230 Updating Config Files 05 02 02 Success 00 00 19 230 Updating Config Files 05 02 03 Success 00 00 19 230 Performing General Upgrades 00 00 19 508 Loading Host Settings 00 00 19 705 Configuring SuperUser 00 00 19 933 Synchronizing Host Files nn mnn 9n 13 Prerciiting Additinnal amp erinmre Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard The Custom installation method provides full customization during your DotNetNuke installation Note Images used in this tutorial will vary slightly to your version For details on enabling optional skins containers and languages during your custom install Creating a Custom Installation Setup before beginning this tutorial Step One DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Comple
85. 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Goto the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 At Enable Module Online Help select from these options e Check jm the check box to enable e Uncheck r4 the check box to disable Help URL http www dotnetnuke comy default aspx tabid 787 f Enable Module Online Help 5 Click the amp Update link Linke miki Add Link Import Content Export Content A Help sal Online Help Eal Settings Creating and Managing Portals About the Portals Page The Portals page allows the Host to create and maintain all portals within this DNN installation It also allows the Host to generate a template of an existing portal for duplication on another DNN portal installation The portals page displays a list of all existing portals including the following details of each Portal Title The Title of the portal as set on the Admin gt Site Settings page Portal Aliases The http aliases for the portal Users The number of Registered Users for the portal Disk Space The amount of space in Mega Bytes MB allocated to the portal Hosting Fee The monthly fee set for the portal Expires The date when hosting for this portal is set to expire What is the difference between a parent and child portal A Parent portal is associated with a unique URL E g http www dotnetnuke com This generally involves purchasing a Domain Name from an In
86. 116 Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page ccc ccc cece aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aee 117 Adding a New Page from aTemplate aa a aaa a aaa a a a aaa aaa aaa aaa ae 119 Inserting a User Profile Page 2 2 2 2 20 aaa 121 Manace NA AA Kl a 122 Viewne Any PIADEG asbak TER 122 Copying Design to Children Pages 2c ccccccecccccccccccceecccceeececeeeeecceceeeccceeeeteceeeesesceeess 124 Option One Using the Ribbonbar 22 2 2 00 ccc cece cece cece I a esee a ssl erre aaa aaa 124 Option Two Using the Ribbonbar or Iconbar aaa aa I emrrl 124 Copying Permissions to Descendant Pages 2 22 2200 aa cece cece ccc aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 125 Option One Using the Ribbonbar 22 2 22 20 occ AN aaa a aaa aaa aaa 126 Option Two Using the Ribbonbar or Iconbar Losses 126 Exporting a Pafe Laba a ak ud etd atcha Serie ete E DU A akah a a a ak dan ka a d an da a NN 127 Importing a New Page a a a aa aa a a a a aa aaa a aaa aaa aaa a aaa a aaa ee 129 Replacing the Current Page with a Page Template Import Page eese esee 130 CNet AA 131 Option One Directly from the Control Panel aa c cece I errem lll 131 Option Two Via the Site Settings Page 132 Manage Setlings aaa bates eaaa eaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa eaaa 132 About Page Permi
87. 20 0 0 0 000000 0 00 2 o ccc cece cece cnc a a aa a a a aa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa 282 Navigating Files in the File Manager 282 Selecuns AA E a D 283 Filtering DIL RRERRENRRRPRIE 284 Reordering Files aaa 284 Refreshing Files a 285 Copying NS RR RR TRIP 285 NA AA AA 286 Uploading a Single File aa aa a a aaa a aa aa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa aaa 287 Uploading Multiple Files 288 Unzipping Compressed Files 11 22 2220 2 20 0 c cece ccc aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aa aaa eaaa 289 Downloading a File 290 Deleting a File 290 Deleting Multiple Files 201 Adding Search Capabilities To Your Site 292 About the Search Admin Module aa sess sls llli 292 Re Indexing Searched Content aaa aaa aa aa aaa aa aaa aaa aa aaa aaa 292 Including Common Words in Searches 203 Including Numbers in Searches 203 Setting the Maximum Word Length for Searches 294 Setting Minimum Word Length for Searches 0 0 0 0 0c cece cece aaa eaaa aaa 294 Submitting Your Site To Search Engines eea eaaa aaa aaa 295 About the Sitemap Module aaa aa a aaa see I Is lerem a a aaa a eaaa 295 Configuring the Sitemap Settings c cece ccc cece c cece a aa a aaa aa aaa aan 296 Submitting Site to Google NAAN aaa a aaa a aaa eaaa 209 Submitting Site to Yahoo or Bing 299 Managing Site A
88. 7 9 08 AM 8 amp 1 P 70r2aP amp A D P 633282985407609550 633282624000000000 864000000000 Indicates if the user is appr Displays the date and time the user registered on the s Indicates if the user is curr online Displays the description of rent page Displays the full URL of th page Page relative path to icon fi Displays the keywords for t rent page Page name Page relative path Page URL Current date and time For date time and numeric you can also append a strin defined by the NET frame for example Current date time formatte according to e g Date Time Now fj displays curre in short format does not a expressions of calculated cc CPU tick count for current CPU tick count since midn CPU ticks per day for calci How to preview either the current content or previous versions of content in an HTML module For either workflow you may feel you want to preview the content before saving publishing it 1 Select P Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the P Edit Content link e OPTION ONE Previewing content currently displayed in the RTE d Click the 6 Preview link This displays the content in the Preview Content section below e OPTION TWO 1 This option provides more information about the content and lets you preview the content for previous versions as well as the current one Maximize the Version History section Locate the version you wish to preview
89. 75 Adding a Child Portal L une II eem rire aaa aaa aaa PAPA Exporting a Portal Template 79 Editing Portal Host Settings 81 Installing And Allocating Modules 84 Installing Available EkKtensions aee aa aa aa aa aaa a aaa aaa aaa 84 Installing a New Module_ aee cece ccc eea aa cnc aaa aa cece cee aaa a aa aaa a aaa aaa 85 Enabling Disabling Premium Module 89 Assigning Unassigning Premium Modules to Portals aaa aaa ae 91 Building Your Portal And Adding Content 92 Configuring Site Settings For A Porta ae aaa a aaa aa aaa aaa aa aaa 92 About the Site Settings Page aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa aaa 92 Site GUUS ion cope asana aa aa ak dus bat Dana a LANA LE a Aa andere aa Asha aa ad KE a asa a AN a di a e a EL ai a 04 Seung Hie ibe TE aaa aa AKDA aa Na a a BADA a PEG Bana DN Na fonc A ep LR La re Seis eu oun LAB bae nii 94 Setting the Site Descriptlon NN a a a aaa a aaa aaa aaa aaa 04 Displaying the Site Title in the Copyright NOtiCe aaa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa ea aaa aaa 95 Creating a Unique Copyright Notice 2 0 0 22000 c cece cece oana aaa a aa a aaa a aaa a a aa a a aaa a aaa 95 ADPEAT ANGE ia E a e LL TE E ENE KE E A aaa a Se ED EEN LL LIA DEAE 96 Setting the Site Logo0 aa TU 96 Payment Settings aaa aa a aa a a aa a aaa aa a a aaa aaa a aaa a aa
90. At No Duplicate Addresses select from these options e Check jg the check box to remove duplicate addresses entered into the Additional Emails field e Uncheck r4 the check box to send duplicates entered into this field Note This does not affect the User Role s field which will always remove duplicates iv At Priority select the priority of the email High Normal Low from the drop down box The default setting is Normal v At Send Method select BCC One Email To Blind Distribution List Not Personalized vi At Send Action select from the following options e Synchronous Emails are all sent before your page refreshes This method is suitable for small mail outs of approximately 100 or less e Asynchronous This starts a separate thread user process to send emails This method is suitable for large mail outs of approximately 100 or more 18 Click the Send Email link Tip A Successful or Not Successful message is displayed after you click the Send Email link For Syn chronous send action the message doesn t display until after all emails have been sent For Asynchronous send action the message displays once the send action has successfully commenced Newsletters a Basic Settings In this section you can set up required sender and recipients as well as subject for your message d Addressees User Role s Filter By Group lt Global Roles gt Administrators E Newsletter Registered Users E
91. Author ized users can create a page link using the Links module See Setting a Page Link Adding Pages Inserting a Page RibbonBar How to add a page to a site using the RibbonBar Note If content localization is enabled this task adds a page which is a neutral culture and will be the same for all languages This tutorial assumes you are viewing the site in its default language 1 Maximize the Control Panel 2 Goto the Common Tasks tab 3 Goto the Insert Page section 4 In the Name text box enter a name for the page This is the name which appears in the menu Skip to Step 7 accept the default options which adds this page to the save level of the menu after to the right of the current page 5 OPTIONAL At Template select the page template for this page The Default template is selected by default 6 OPTIONAL At Include In Menu check jm the check box to include this page in the menu OR Uncheck p the check box to hide the page OPTIONAL At Insert select from these options e Skip this step to add the page after to the right of the page you are currently on e Select to add the page either Before to the left of or After to the right of the page name selected in the second drop down box This adds the page on the same level in the menu e Select to add the page as a Child Of the page name selected in the second drop down box Click the Add Page button The page will now be added and set as visible to Administra
92. Book MicroButton 0 0 00 91 1 9 5 2007 f DotNetNuke Text D 0 00 22 2 9 5 2007 2 9 5 2007 waw DNNangel com Text D 0 00 56 P DNNangel MicroButton 0 00 0 69 5 2007 Add New Banner Enabling Disabling Banner Advertising How to enable or disable site wide banner advertising If this feature is enabled a single banner is displayed on each site page where the skin object Banner is included in the page skin design The banner displayed changes to a new banner each time a page is refreshed or revisited Note This feature only works for banners whose type is set as banner l Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site We from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings Site Marketing section 4 At Banners select from these options e None Select to disable banner advertising e Site Select to enable banner advertising for vendors maintained on this site under Admin gt Ven dors or using a Vendors module which has been added to a page e Host Select to enable banner advertising for vendors maintained on this installation under Host gt Vendors 5 Click the amp Update link Emailing Banner Status to Vendor How to send a banner status report to the related vendor using the Vendors module The report contains the fol lowing information Banner Name Banne
93. Changing your Password How to update the password associated with your user profile 1 2 Login to the site Logging into a Site Click on your Display Name link typically located in the top right corner of the site OR Navigate to a My Profile module This displays the My Profile page Click the Edit Profile link This displays the Manage Profile page Click the jz Manage Password link In the Change Password section update the following fields a In the Current Password text box enter your current password b In the New Password text box enter your new password c In the Confirm Password text box re enter your new password Click the amp Change Password link Manage Profile gt Manage User Credentials sl Mana je Password u Manage Profile 3 Ma nage Services Password Last ee a Changed Tuesday March 16 2010 Password Expires Password does not Expire Change Password In order to change your password you will need to provide your current password as well as your new password and a confirmation of your new password Current Password New Password Confirm Password n Change Password anging your Password Managing your Profile Photo How to manage the photo associated with your user profile 1 Go to the Manage Profile page of the My Profile module See Managing your User Profile 2 Go to the Photo field and select from these options e To Up
94. Content Adding basic te Adding Rich Text How to add rich text to the HTML module ah 1 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link 2 At Editor select the Rich Text Editor radio button This displays the content as rich text 3 Enter your text insert images links etc 4 OPTIONAL Click the 6 Preview link 5 OPTIONAL At Publish check jg the check box to publish OR uncheck jy the check box if the con tent is not yet ready for publishing Note This field only displays when Content Staging is enabled Set ting a Workflow 6 Click the 45 Save link Related Topics e See About the RadEditor e See About the FCK Editor Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box amp Rich Text Editor Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aenean dolor erat fringilla vehicula porta non mattis ut neque Mullam rhoncus lectus et vehicula aliquam nisl metus volutpat nunc ut consequat libero turpis in urna Vestibulum porta dui non sapien sollicitudin bibendum Morbi varius lacus magna Etiam blandit rhoncus posuere e Vivamus at nisi eu lectus malesuada lobortis e Donec commodo neque sed enim vulputate sed i DOTNETNUKE PRE ONAT se Quisque venenatis tincidunt tellus in mattis libero euismod nec Quisque ultrices lacus eu enim accumsan quis dapibus justo dapibus ornare felis imperdiet de Words 85 Characters 569 a
95. Database Version 05 00 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 00 01 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 01 5uccess pgrading Database to Version 05 01 02 Success parading Database to Version 05 01 03 Success parading Database to Version 05 01 04 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 01 S5uccess Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 02 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 03 Success Installation of Database Complete Step Five Configure Host Account 1 Complete the following Host Account details a In the First Name text box enter the first name of the Host b In the Last Name text box enter the last name of the Host c In the User Name text box enter a user name for the Host d In the Password text box enter a password for the Host e In the Confirm Password text box re enter the password for the Host f In the Email Address text box enter the email address of the Host 2 Complete the SMTP Server Settings a In the Server text box enter your SMTP server name or IP address b At Authentication select the required authentication method from Anonymous Basic or NTLM c At Enable SSL select from these option e Check jm the check box to enable SSL secure socket layers for secure pages e Uncheck r4 the check box to disable 3 Click the Next mp nja butto
96. Displays the next page of files Move Last button Displays the last page of files Used 10 39HB of unlimited File Manager navigation Selecting Files How to select one or more files in the File Manager module Selecting files enables you to perform file man agement tasks such as copying and moving files Here are the options for selecting files Select a File Check jm the check box to the right of the file to select it ete Folder Ee Synchronize Files Recursive te Files A 2007 4 44 26 PM A 3466 7 007 4 44 26 PM A 14111 2 X CI a Ika Deselect a File Uncheck j the check box to the right of the file to deselect it ete Folder Ga Synchronize Files Recursive ste Files A 0 2007 4 44 26 PM A 346828 F 0 2007 4 44 26 PM A 1411148 Select All Files Check pq the check box in the title bar of the Files List Window to select all of the displayed files Use the Items Per Page tool if you want to select more files at one time This enables you to select up to 50 files at one time ete Folder Synchronize Files Recursive te Files SN e 2007 4 44 26 PM A 3 466 z x 2007 4 44 26 PM A 14 111 x Deselect All Files Uncheck the check box in the title bar of the Files List Window to deselect all of the dis played files ete Folder EE Synchronize Files 7 Recursive te Files A te Size 5 0 2007 4 44 26 PM A 3466 2 F 0 2007 4 44 26 PM A muga F Filtering Files How to
97. ETNUKE pellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee Marketplace Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euismod in ac libero Vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sodales varius Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim Donec ut augue in tortor mattis ullamcorper et non nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncus P Edit Content 3 Add or edit content as required A tool bar with a number basic text formatting tools and link insertion is available 4 Click the Save ial button to save your changes OR Click the Cancel button to cancel your changes Note If Content Staging is enabled this new content will require publishing before it is displayed Publishing a Draft dh piscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat entum fermentum orci justo viverra ligula id baga hr stinye est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Va DOTNETNUKE Update Ellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee Marketplace Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euismod in ac libero Vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sodales varius Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim Donec ut augue in tortor mattis ullamcorper et non nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncus f Edit Content Related Topics
98. Editor 1 Place your cursor where you want to place the code block 2 Click the Format Code Block button This opens the Format Code Block window 3 In the Paste Source Code Below text box paste the source code In the Options section OPTIONAL In the Max Snippet Width text box set the maximum width of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage Do this by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons The value will automatically be saved as pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol 96 into the text box E g Enter 100px or 100 to set the width as 100 pixels or enter 100 to set the width as 100 Leave blank for no specified width OPTIONAL In the Max Snippet Height text box set the maximum height of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage Leave blank for no specified width At Select Language select the language of the code block from these options Markup X HTML XML ASPX Javascript CSS C CPP VB Php SQL Delphi or Python At Display Line Numbers check jy the check box to display line numbers for each line of code OR uncheck j the check box to disable numbering 9 OPTIONAL Click the Preview button to preview the code in the Preview window below Format Code Block Paste source cade below lt table style width 500px gt lt thead gt z thead lt thody gt i lt td gt How to handcode a table in HTML lt td gt
99. Forta Setting the Host Details The host title appears on all portals within this DNN installation which have a skin that includes the HOST NAME skin token Where the host URL field is also completed the Host Title functions as a link to the URL The Host Email field sets the email address of the host portal If the Help skin object is included in the skin it dis plays the word Help and provides an emailto link to the Portal Administrator for normal logged in registered users If a portal administrator is logged in the Help link provides a mailto link to the Host Email address 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Basic Settings section 3 Go to the Host Details section 4 In the Host Title text box enter a name for your Web site such as your business or company name E g DotNetNuke 5 In the Host URL text box enter your company URL E g http www dotnetnuke com 6 In the Host Email text box enter the email address of the host E g support domain com Alternatively leave this field blank to hide this field 7 Click the amp Update link a Host Details Host Portal My Website t Host Title DotNetNuke Host URL http www datnetnuke com TA Host Email support localhost Configuring Proxy Settings Configuring Proxy Settings This setting may be required by your hosting provider to enable certain modules such as the RSS News Feed to process outgoing web requests 1 2 Navigate to
100. Host Host Settings Go to the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Proxy Settings section In the Proxy Server text box enter the proxy server IP address E g 192 1 2 102 Enter the domain or IP address if you are using a proxy server In the Proxy Port text box enter the proxy port address E g 8021 In the Proxy Username text box enter the username provided by your hosting provider In the Proxy Password text box enter the password provided by your hosting provider Click the T Update link E Proxy Settings t Proxy Server 192 1 2 102 t Proxy Port 8021 t Proxy Username MyProxyUsername tf Proxy Password HIITITI Web Request Timeout oniiguring Proxy settings Setting the Web Request Timeout Period How to set the web request time out period for all portals A web request can exist for a set period of time and if this time is exceeded the web page requesting browser is returned an error that the page is unavailable 1 2 Navigate to Host Host Settings Go to the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Proxy Settings section In the Web Request Timeout text box enter the time period in seconds the web request should timeout after E g Enter 60 to set to 60 seconds Click the T Update link E Proxy Settings f Proxy Server 192 1 2 102 f Proxy Port 8021 f Proxy Username MyProxyUsername t Proxy Password sesanan Configuring SMTP Server Settings Setti
101. IONAL To edit the subject associated with email message language files edit the associated Subject resource file which will be listed above the Body resource file Click the Update link OPTIONAL Repeat all of the above steps to update this message for another language Working With Files And Images About the File Manager Module The File Manager Module enables the management of files on this site This module allows authorized users to upload new files download files delete files and synchronize the file upload directory It also provides infor mation on the amount of disk space used and available This administration module can be added to any site page and is also displayed on the Admin and Host menus Host Tip The File Manager module located on the Host page provides the host with access to all files across all portals within this DNN application Folders Standard File System c Add Folder i Delete Folder Synchronize Files Recursive Files Refresh FF Copy Files xd Move Files AEUpload Moelete Files OQ Portal Root d aspnet gif 8 20 2007 1 34 07 PM background gif 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM benefactor gif 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM book dummies 1 jpg 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM book packti jpg 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM book wrox1 jpg 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM book wrox2 jpg B 20 2007 4 44 26 PM crystaltech jpg 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM cutesoft jpg 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM easyogi gif 8 20 2007 4 44 26 PM A A A A A A A A A A HE x sp
102. ML module e OPTION ONE 1 Select X3 Publish from the HTML module menu OR Click the Publish link HTML e Dear John Citizen Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat facilisis Vestibulum eleifend magna quis fermentum fermentum orci justo viverra ligula id i tristique est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Nam Je DOTNETNUKE pellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee Marketplace Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euismod in ac libero Vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sodales varius Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim Donec ut augue in tortor mattis ullamcorper et non nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncu P Edit Conten e OPTION TWO 1 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link 2 OPTIONAL Edit content as required 3 OPTIONAL Click the w Preview link 4 At Publish check 17 the check box to publish OR Uncheck F the check box if the content is not yet ready for publishing 5 Click the qp Save link Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor IE Source ie B J 3 d 5 El Jj B 7 U dex x Jis c d Jib 49 c3 9 O3 Style Font Size Hd Dear User FirstName User LastName Lorem ipsum
103. Manage Profile Properties User Settings diting a user accoun Unauthorizing a User Account How to unauthorize a user account using the User Accounts module Unauthorized users are unable to login to the portal or thereby removing their access to all role restricted areas 1 Find the user to be unauthorized using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit button beside their record This opens the Edit User Accounts Manage User Cre dentials page 3 Click the UnAuthorize User link 4 Click the Update link I Edit User Accounts User successfully Un Authorized Edit User Garry Id 11 User Name Garry Created Date 9 4 2007 1 52 First Name Garry Last Login Date 9 4 2007 1 52 Last Name Gazza Last Activity Date 9 4 2007 3 44 PI 5 H 7 0 4 2007 1 52 P Display Name Gan Garra Last Password Change j4 Last Lock out Date Email Address garry domain com E User Is On Line X Delete Update Locked Out L lad Authorized m us Update Password C rj UnAuthorize User Force Password Change add New User Ed Manage Profile Properties Cancel Unau orizing a user accoun A You are not currently authorized to login to this site User Name garry Password Login Remember Login Forgot Password e message displayed to unauthorized users attempting to login Authorizing An Unauthorized User
104. Manage Settings Users with Manage Settings permissions can change any of the module s settings except for the permissions e Full Control This is the same as the edit permission from previous versions Users with full control per missions have full administrator rights for the module Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt Edit Manage Full View Content Delete Export Import Settings Control Administrators r3 3 All Users Bloggers Chat Members EditUser Forum Admin T ah EY qe a Forum Member Global Moderator Module Editor Newsletter Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users DL D e DI D DI DJ CI DI BI CI CI S LEO DU DULL L tcr TOGO OO O O Ea ee CJ ETE J J F1 EI QC EJ EJ EJ L F1 E EFI P1 P1 QD EJ EJ E31 O LI EL OI D QS DJ CDI CI DI EDI CI Username ale Add Inherit View permissions from Page Viodule Permissions 1n DNN Frotessiona ition Community Edition Module Permissions Here is the list of module permissions available in Community Edition e View Module Enable users to view the module on the page e Edit Give users full control to edit the module TA Permissions View Module Edit Module Administrators All Users Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users View Module Edit Module pi John d ad Username John Inherit View permissions from Page Page Settings Basic Settings Setting Module Content Alignment How
105. ONAL In the Alt Text text box enter the text to be displayed for this area f Click the Update Area button 4 Repeat Step 3 to add additional area 5 These additional editing options are available e To edit an existing area click on it in the preview window edit the properties as required and then click the Update Area button e To remove an area click the Remove Area button e To remove all areas click the Remove All button 6 Click OK to save Image Map Editor Preview Choose Image Choose Image Portals D Gallery 389 Ecc 9 Select Area Shape Rectangle C Circle Define Area Properties Left 152 px Top 133 px Width 173 ps Height 150 px URL http qmm ecozany comfhandmade a a Target New Window Alt Text Hand painted facial features Update Area Area RemoveArea RemoveAll Remove All reating an Image Map Setting Image Properties How to set the optional properties of an image using the Image Manager of the RADEditor 1 2 If the image has already been inserted right click on the image and select the Properties button Click the Lock Ratio g Unlock Ratio 7 button to unlock or lock the width height ratio at any time Unlocking the ratio enables the width and or height to be modified independently In the Width text box enter the width in pixels which the image will be displayed as In the Height text box enter the height in pixels whi
106. ONE ES Ebo ION EDS DON dea UM TAN8NG 156 Ading Module COCCI ec acters teeters eg eg Ag a aga a aaa kaa bai aana a p KA aan ai a a pana naa 157 Editing Module Content_ aaa aaa aa aa a a a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 158 Deleung Mod k Con EN aa ganas a Gan aan redire So aa aa Saka ae a oae a La a aa na padana an dang 159 Deleunga Mod le sat aa dadana AS ada a baa nb nual uh NANANA aaa 159 Managing Modules a aa a aa a aa a a aa a aa a a aa a a aaa a aa a 2222033222 160 About the Module Menu aaa aaa 160 Opening the Module MENU a 161 Exporting Module Content Em 162 MAN AA 163 Imporune Module COME aaa anapa da ANA a aaa aa DN aaa ATA bu KOO aa sabak PALA thd Da aha alangi t ka 164 Moving a Module to 2 New Pane occi NAAN dn cack ieee de a b a aj na Hara aninag 165 Moving Module Position in Same Pane aaa aa aa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 166 MAGA Dhaka asas aana dag ak A Ba Ka a BNN Ka a Da SEA Bah ag aaa a dan ak ag ab 167 Refreshing Module Content 220 0222 22 aa a aa a a aa a aaa a aaa a aaa a a aaa a aaa aaa 168 Viewing Editing Module Settings aaa aa aaa aaa a aaa IR aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa 168 Managing Module Settings 169 About Module Setini Sha aco oco a a DE aan aa Ka ia enn oat E ag BD I KANE E a E AMI nn 169 Setting the Module Title 2 22 22 occ aaa ma wa aaa aaa a aaa a aaa a
107. OR Go to a Sitemap module 2 Go to the Site Submission section 3 At Search Engine select Google 4 When signing up with Google Webmaster Tools you will need to Verify your site ownership Choose the Upload an HTML file method from the Google Verification screen 5 In the Verification text box enter the filename displayed I e google53cocefa35b2b81e html 6 Click the Create link 7 Return to Google and select the Verify button 8 Return to the Sitemap module 9 At Search Engine click the Submit link El Site Submission In this section you can submit your site to different search engines Search Engine Google Submit Verification google53c0cef435b2b81e html Ee submitting Site to Google Submitting Site to Yahoo or Bing How to submit a site for indexing to either the Yahoo or Bing search engine using the Sitemap module 1 Navigate to Admin Search Engine Sitemap OR Go to a Sitemap module 2 Goto the Site Submission section 3 At Search Engine select either Bing or Yahoo 4 Click the Submit link 5 Repeat Steps 3 4 to submit the site to the other search engine if desired 1 Site Submission In this section you can submit your site to different search engines Search Engine Bing Submit QUEE P Create Managing Site Access Using Security Roles About the Security Roles Module The Security Roles module enables the creation and management of security roles and security rol
108. Portals See About the Portals Page Link to Host gt Dashboard See Viewing Dashboard Information Link to Host gt What s New See About the What s New Module Link to Host gt Professional Features gt Manage Web Servers See About the Web Se Link to Host gt Technical Support Opens the DNN Professional Support Ticket syste Link to Host gt Scheduler See About the Schedule Page Link to Host gt SQL See About the SQL Page Link to Host gt Application Integrity page See About the File Integrity Checker Moc Allows switching to different portals See Switching Sites Link to Host gt Marketplace See About the Marketplace Module Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition May require login to the new site Mode View Edit Layout Admin af Host Common Tasks Current Page Host Host Settings Super Users Extensions Dashboard Web Servers Scheduler Integrity Marketplace hd E g Switch Site File Manager Sites What s New Support Manage Information Switch Site Marketplace Overview of the Iconbar The Iconbar Control Panel provides a single interface from which authorized users can access page and module management tools shortcuts to six common administration tasks and quick links to the Administration and Host pages Mode View Edit Layout admin of Host Page Functions Add New Module Add Existing Module Common Tasks P aa Module Select A Modules Pane C
109. QL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option e Uncheck r4 the check box if you have been given a UserId Password to access your Data base and provide the UserId Password combination 1 In the User ID text box enter the UserID for the Database li In the Password text box enter the Password for the Database d At Run as db Owner select from these options e Check 1 the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner e Uncheck j the check box if you will be running as the User ID specified e OPTIONAL In the Object Qualifier text box enter a prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes 2 Click the Next ya button r DOTNEeTNUKE LT Configure Database Connection You can configure the database settings used by DotNetNuke on this page If you are installing DotNetNuke in a Hosting Account your hosting provider should have provided you with the information There are two options for SQL Server 2005 2008 SQLServer 2005 and SQL Server 2008 support the use of Database Files In most situations you should choose the Database option but if you are using SQL Server 2005 2008 Express then you should use the File option Select Database Server Database Integrated Security Run as db Owner Object Qualifier SQL Server 2005 2008 Express File SOL Server 2005 2008 Data
110. This manual is written to assist users of all levels with using building and maintaining DNN sites About DotNetNuke DotNetNuke DNN is an open source Portal and Content Management Framework based on Microsoft s NET technology DNN offers a robust extensible and fully functional framework for the development of a broad range of commercial portal applications DNN is a world leading open source portal and content management framework adopted by thousands of organ izations worldwide Typically portals provide a single web front end to the many applications within an organization For example it may present critical information from HR Finance Marketing Customer Service etc all from one web site Con nected back end systems also provide businesses with the opportunity to combine information and more easily assist About DotNetNuke Corp Who is DotNetNuke Corp DotNetNuke Corp or DNN Corp is the creator of DotNetNuke the most widely adopted framework for build ing web sites and web applications on Microsoft ASP NET Using DotNetNuke businesses can quickly develop and deploy interactive dynamic public web sites intranets extranets and web applications DNN Corp provides this framework in both Community and Professional editions Founded in 2006 DNN Corp is privately held Our Mission Our mission is to create entrepreneurial opportunities around the world by providing a superior open source web application f
111. Timetable pdf Upload New File Sending a newsletter with replacement tokens Remedial M assage Center Newsletter No 1 Unicode UTF 8 File Edit View Tools Message Help Wi Reply WE Reply All S Forward a host domain com host domain com Thursday 6 September 2007 11 31 AM Emma domain com au Emma domain com auz Remedial Massage Center Newsletter No 1 Attach p Documents Yoga Timetable pdf 71 9 KB Dear Emma Eversome Welcome to the first newsletter for the Remedial Massage Website What is our am Providing the latest news research and more on remedial massage including deep tissue massage and sports massage This month we have a number of great new offers to whet vour appetite Including 20 off Remedial Massage for all out subscribers Managing Site Design Setting Page Layout amp Design Installing a Skin or Container Package How to install a skin or container package using the Extensions module Installed skins are available to all sites within this installation 1 Navigate to Host gt Extensions 2 Select s Install Extension Wizard from the module menu OR Click the s Install Extension Wiz ard link This opens the Install Extension Wizard 3 Complete the wizard See Using the Install Extension Wizard Uploading Installing a Host Skin How to upload a legacy skin package to the Host skin directory from the Host Settings page 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go t
112. Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users View Module Edit Module John Username John W Inherit View permissions from Page Setting Page Permissions How to set page permissions by username and roles This tutorial assumes you are on the Page Settings page of a page Note Access to view and set page permissions is only available to Administrators and users with Edit Full Control permissions for the page See About Page Permissions IMPORTANT In DNN Community edition page management permissions consist of View and Edit per missions only In DNN Professional page management includes ten different permissions for page management which are the same for both users and roles See About Page Permissions 1 Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section 2 Goto Permissions 3 At Username enter the username of a user that you want to grant or deny page viewing permissions to and then click the ef Add link 4 OPTIONAL At Filter By Group select from the following options e All Roles gt Select to view all roles both global role and roles groups in one single list e lt Global Roles gt Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group E g Admin istrators All Users Registered Users and Unauthenticated Users e Role Group Name Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group 5 In the View or View Page column click on the check box beside a user role repeatedly
113. a At Folders select one of the following options from the drop down box e Standard File System e Secure File System e Secure Database Stores file content as a byte array in the database b Enter a name for the new folder into the text box located on the Folders Toolbar E g Documents c Click the pk Add Folder button The new folder is displayed in the Folders list M m File Manager Standard File System Downloads ici Add Folder F Folders u i m it Refresh SCopy Files Move Files File Name amp 160886 3c c9e0 49d2 85d 1 7217ddeead B 6551e3f2 bz2fe 4c9f 9be 2 3b50f6 19c8a3 Portal Root LJbanners WAN A Adding a new folder to the File Manager Assigning Folder Permissions by Role How to assign access to view folders and upload to folders of the File Manager Administrators can assign folder permissions to one or more security roles Here s a description of the two types of permissions available e View Folder This enables users within the permitted roles to view the files within this folder If View Folder permissions are not provided users cannot view these files E g If an image is displayed in the Media module only users who belong to role permitted to View Folder will be able to see the image e Write to Folder This enables users within the permitted roles to upload and delete files using the Link Control on modules such as the Links module How to as
114. a a 224 Inserts AGM uui pagala ay Sad teh coed unis D a A E aa ba aaa aa Bacula aa HA ba a aa aaa a ag EDAD Ba ade 224 asero MEIN aas aaa na AA kang aa aa PAANAN AA 225 TSO I deu aas anan naak aa ak aa a E LAB NA af a BE E a Ga aa SE DE BABE 227 Paine dmn ACC colts NI a a a E BG DN LL ed EE Aon pay ee ed ED aa a aa eee 226 Working with the Image EditO0r aa a aa a aa a aaa a a Im aaa a aaa a aaa 226 Create an Tima ge Ma scp baa aa La a a kaag Deep eo a aa ak ba a BA pa ka ag ba aa BALL na aaa aa a La kaba aaa kh aaa DA 231 SENIN Image Proper ND 233 AG maa Image Ma aas aa RENTRER ot eee RT DL TERR 234 Managing Tinks and ANCHO cc saa ngaba e td cited aaa a baha aa E aa a aa aa aa ba Mba E Ba aa aaa aa ka 235 Adding an Emal bid PHP PEE 235 PITA AP uod ur d 236 Addinca HUI REPE 236 Editns a De arden een oe ISI ME LIQUIDA UIT LEM E 236 Doe oe q Lk onse a EN ees ant us uL M AA 237 Eco an ATCP ca he ee aos eri a ba aa atem dM cendi Bote me eG DERE aie a aaa da tated 237 ilaan BAUL AA 238 Bid arr am ANENG OMNI RII 238 NManaeme Tabl65 c naga ing baanga aa a aa aaa a Sa E REIR UIN janan AG NEUE 236 PTGS OTA a AMA 238 FOGG Pa Table cance eR EUR HERE BN RE ace aa RH ER EE RO 240 Setting Table Properties 222 222 2000 ccc ccc cece cece cece cece ce IRR Imm IIl a a a aaa a aaa a aaa aa ae 241 Setting Cell Properties 2 22 220 c ccc AN a aaa aaa aa aaa aaa aee 243 Setting Table
115. a a aaa 07 Setting the Payment Process0r aaa a a a a aa a a a a a aa a aa a a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa ae 97 Oher Sel aaa aaa ERRORES 98 Setting the Primary Administrator aaa cece a 98 Setting the Default Language aaa aaa bce edd ave sls a aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa aaa aaa ae 99 Setting the Portal TimeZ0ne a aaa 99 Using the Site Wizard aaa 100 Working with the Control Panel eee 009090000000 a kababasa aika sa nasaan 105 About the DNN Control Panels 7 105 Overview of the RibbonBar 22200000500000 0000 0 0 c cence cece a aaa a a aaa aaa aaa aaa 106 Common Tasks Tab 2 0 0 2 ccc cece cece eee e eee a a a cece cece cece ec a a aaa aa a aaa aaa 106 Current Pase AA 108 PACHA EON A agers TETTE RON TRECE PRENDE Hanh beau A AB Bak aba IKS nta 109 HOS dd B o ENNIO TERT RS ENERO CC 110 Overview of the Iconbar 222000000 000 sees sse esses a a lees rnanan 111 Page ARA 111 Nodul We KY T 8 ON ia aa En eae a aa aR AR A eo a a NG aa E AR Een ne aE ENE ee ae ere 111 6801 20101 0 DdSkS KA AA KNA TT TAA RA RI C TO TANG CDM MM Ree a M 111 Maximizing Minimizing the Control Panel zzz 112 Setting Control Panel Mode a cc cence aa aaa a a aaa a aaa a aaa kaaa 113 Adding and Managing Pages 116 AA 116 Viewing Any Page aaa 116 Adding PACS ERR DT XE 116 Inserting a Page RibbonBar 2 0
116. a member s service on the My Profile module gl Edit Security Roles a Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this rale Role Name Monthly Online Magazine Description Join this free service to receive our online magazine each month including monthly prize draw discount coupons and more Role Group lt Global Roles gt amp 9 Public Role Auto Assignment F Advanced Settings Update Cancel reate a member service by checking Public Kole I Manage Profile S2 mana e User Credentials Manage Password 9 Manage Profile W Mar age Services This section allows you to manage your subscriptions on the site You can subscribe to some Services by entering an RSVP Code If you have been given a special RSVP code you can subscribe to these Services by entering the code in the RSVP Code field and clicking the Subscribe button next to the field To manage the other subscription services provided by this site you can use the grid below Some services may require payment If this is the case you will be redirected to a payment site When you return to this site you can check back here to view your subscription Enter RSVP Code Subscribe Trial Expiry Name Description Fee Date Unsubscribe Subscribers A public role for portal subscriptions Free Monthly Online Join this free service to receive our online magazine each month induding mm Magazine monthly prize draw disc
117. aa a aaa a aaa a aaa eaaa ae 170 Setting Module Tags a aa ada a aa a a GALET a aa La hahaha lyka aaa aaa aaa 171 Setting Module Permissl0ns aaa a a a a aa a aa a a a a a aaa a aaa aa a aaa aaa 171 About Module PermisslO0ns aaa aa a aa LLL a a a a a aaa aaa 174 aaa BET ABA e ANG AA cae LL E EMIL E LEG miga BAHO BAG NG ANA TIR HETO Ka a BARAT AGILANG 176 Dasic DEN SS cr cn ott E a DA E E GB ER ME D E Na GG SG LA NG D Na E Na a E a E aa sneer 176 Setting Module Content Alignment aaa aaa a a a a a a aa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 176 Setting Module Background Color 177 Setting Module Border Width aaa aa aa aa III RII aaa a aaa a aaa a a aaa aaa 179 Setting Visibility of Module Content aaa aaa a aa a aa a aa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa 161 Setting a Module as a WebSlice __ aaa a a a aaa a a a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 164 Overriding the Default Container 22 0 220 0 2 ccc cece aa aaa aa a aaa aa aa aaa a aaa aa ae 185 Localization SANDS aan a Nang a EE D 186 About Localization Settings aa 186 Managing Content for Individual Modules aaa coco cece eaaa aaa aaa aaa 187 AA AG ieg a a nabi kn a a nee AA APA 167 About the HTML HTML Pro Module aaa aa a aaa a aa a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aa aaa ae 187 NGT SUPA POK ATA 168 Enabling Disabling Inline EditOor aa aa aa aa a aaa a
118. aa a aaa a aaa aaa 188 Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying 2 00 0 2000 c ec a aa a aa a a a aaa aaa aa ae 188 Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying Losses RII aaa a a aaa aaa 189 Module BATO mna Hand YG NANG aang a a a aaa a a aa a a a aa a a aa a a aa aa ma PAG Ab aa aa aa aaa 189 Adding Editing Text Inline aaa AN a aa a aaa a aaa aaa a a aaa eaaa 169 Adding Basic Text aaa aaa a a aaa aa a a aaa a a a aaa aaa aa aaa aaa 190 Pae HAEN AA 193 Adding Replacement Tokens 220 220 a cece a a a a a a aa a a aaa aaa aaa aee 105 HTML Replacement Tokens aaa a a a a a a a aa a a a aa a a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 197 Previewing CODIGO AGANG ANGARA AE MAAN AA DENENANING DL E a anaa ara E ra ahaaa BAE E E ag alaa 198 Managing My Workflow Tasks aaa aaa aaa a aa a aaa a aa a aaa a a aaa a aaa aaa a aaa 200 Approving or Rejecting Content 201 Publishing a Draft in oe an 0 kaka a a ak kaa KA D Na a daa a AA ipa a a Gg 202 Rolling Back Content 2 00 00 202 aa a a aaa aa aaa a aa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 204 Module Settings aa KG AP bag a tu aaa aaa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa a D D UE E E 204 Adding a WOTKTIOW Ska nanas aaa ae naba a a ba a aa a ak kad daa a A gaga a a a ga FA a aaa ah adakan al dois 204 Adding a WOPKTOW 22 eitis pote un Souad kna eg aan S a Acla ie E a Ba uM Dh ad aa aa a a d Ba a ag due 205 Changing the Version History Setting aaa a a a a a a aaa a a aaa
119. aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa a aaa aa a aaa aa a aa aa a aa aaa aaa 331 Managing Vendors Banners And Affillates aaa aee eaaa eaaa aii 333 About the Vendors Module 333 NA AA 333 Adding a New Vendor aaa 333 Editing Vendor Account Details 335 Deleting a Vendor Account 2 222 200 222 000 cence aa a aa aaa a a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 337 Vendor Banners aaa eaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aa a aaa aaa a aa aa a aaa aaa a aa aa a a aaa aaa aaa 338 Adding a Text Banner to a Vendor 22 22 0 0 2 22 cece cece aaa aaa aa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 338 Adding an Image Banner to a Vendor 341 Editing a Vendor Banner 2 2 a a c ec cece cece a a aa a aaa a a a aaa aaa aaa 344 Enabling Disabling Banner Advertising 7 344 Emailing Banner Status to Vendor 2222200000000 000000 0 aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a eaaa a aaa 345 Viewing the Clicks and Views for a Banner aa aa a aaa a aaa aaa 345 Affiliate Accounts 346 Overview of Vendor Affiliates a a aa aaa a aaa aa aaa 346 Adding an Affiliate Referral ACCOUNT 0 aa aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 346 Sending Notification of Affiliate Referral Account 347 Sending Newsletters To Site Members 349 About the Newsletters Module ooo 349 Sending a Basic Newsletter 351 Sending a Newsletter with Tokens eaaa aa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa 354 Managing Site Design 356 Setting Page Layout amp Design EE 358 Installing a Skin
120. access to configure a wide range of module options such as permissions design and layout Tip Ensure Mode is set to Edit on the Control Panel 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button nnniinocementz Add New Announcement Import Content Export Content Print Delete E Refresh k Wi sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua pP Add New Announcement S 2 Edit one or more settings as required and then click the gy Update link Y m Module El Module Settings In this section you can define the settings that relate to the Module content and permissions ie those settings that will be the same on all pages that the Module appears El Basic Settings Module Module Title New Product Announcements Tags Blocks Dolls Products Wooden Toys Permissions Filter By Group lt Global Roles gt Edit Manage View Content Delete Export Import Settings Administrators All Users Product Managers Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users Username Ka Add Inherit View permissions from Page e Module Settings page Managing Module Settings About Module Settings All modules include a Module Settings page which enables authorized users to modify basic settings related to the module content e g module title module header and footer module start and end dates and module per missions e g which roles or
121. age Document content is not printed in full e Print Table of Links A reference table of any links is appended to the printout Click to enable Spell checking mode Misspelled words are high lighted in yellow See Check Spelling Find Find And Replace or Find And Replace All Options include Match Case Match Whole Words and search up or down from current cursor position Select all content within the Editor Cut selected content Copy selected content Paste cut or copied content Provides these paste options Paste Paste From Word Paste from Word Strip Font Paste Plain Text and Paste As Html OPTION ONE Click the Undo icon to undo the last action OPTION TWO Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and undo multiple actions at one time OPTION ONE Click Redo icon to redo the last action OPTION TWO Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and redo multiple actions at one time The Color and CSS toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Tool Foreground Color Background Color Description OPTION ONE Click the Arrow icon to open the color picker and then select the required foreground color for the selected con tent OPTION TWO Click the Foreground Color icon to apply the used last color to the content OPTION ONE Click the Arrow icon to open the color picker and then select the required background color for the selected con tent OPTION TWO Click the Back
122. age to be edited 2 Right click on the image and select Properties e To change images At Image Sre click the Image Src button and then locate and select the new image e Modify any other properties as required See Setting Image Properties 3 Click the OK button Tip The new image will inherit the properties of the previous image Working with the Image Editor How to use the Image Editor tool in the Image Manager of the RADEditor 1 Navigate to the required image and click on the filename in the Filename window 2 Click the Image Editor button This opens the Image Editor 3 Select from these editing options a At Opacity drag the slider to the preferred percentage 26 OR Enter the opacity percentage into the text box b In the Resize section i At Constrain proportions check py the check box to lock the width height ratio OR Uncheck r4 the check box to allow the width and height to be modified independently 11 At Width and or Height drag the slider to the preferred image size OR Click the Decrease and Increase buttons The pixel size is displayed in the respective Px text boxes to the right c At Flip select a direction to flip the image from these options None Flip Horizontal Flip Ver tical or Flip Both d At Rotate select from None 90 180 or 270 e At Crop click the Enable Crop button This displays a red box which defines the area to be cropped You can now define
123. ar End Date Calendar Link Url Link Type None URL A Link To An External Resource 2 Page A Page On Your Site File A File On Your Site Perma nently Redirect Advanced settings for existing pages Localization Settings for New Pages How to set the localization setting for new pages on the Page Settings page Note The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled See About Content Localization In the Localization section select from the following e Create Single Neutral Culture Page Select to create a single page which is shared for all languages e Create in Current Culture only Select to create a page for the language you are currently viewing the site in e Create Localized Versions of Page Select to a version of this page for each language This is the default option El Localization Culture Type Create Single Neutral Culture Page Create in Current Culture only 3 Create Localized Versions of Page etting Localization Settings for New Pages Adding and Managing Modules About Modules DNN uses a modular design system to display content on a page One or more modules are added to each site page to create and manage the site content There are many different types of modules each managing a different type of site content or site administrative tasks Your Host can install additional modules Additional modules can be purchased from the Snowco
124. ar go to either the Current Page or the Common Tasks tab and select 4 Edit OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select Settings 4 Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section 5 At Parent Page select a new parent page or select None Specified gt to change this page to a parent page 6 Click the amp Update link 7 iL Page Settings a Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this page Page Details Page Name Services Page Title Health and Healing Services Health and Healing Services for everyone f Description health healing acupuncture massage TA Keywords KA Parent Page None Specfied D E Q mum B Include In Menu El oving the position of a page Copying a Page How to copy any existing page including modules and optional module content Note Page Name is the only man datory field Note The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled See About Content Localization 1 Maximize the Control Panel 2 On the RibbonBar go to the Current Page tab and select Copy OR On the Iconbar go the Page Func tions section and select Copy Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section In the Page Name text box enter a name for the new page The page name is displayed in the menu Complete additional basic settings for this page Basic Settings for New Pages OE MEL EE Go to
125. aracters zah ap Save Cancel A Preview Voditying Editor Size Using the Resource Manager How to navigate to select or manage folders and files using the Resource Manager of the RADEditior The Resource Manager is commonly used for the Image Manager Document Manager Flash Manager Media Man ager and Template Manager tools of the RADEditor Note Access to some tools is restricted by role The Resource Manager consists of the following toolbar and windows Resource Manager Toolbar Folder Win dow Filename Window Preview Properties Window Image Manager Resource Manager Toolbar E NECS MIDI 4 E Portal Raat F Documents Ba Doll Grace001 sml png 234835 Folder Window E Exports amp AbbeyDolljpg 100823 P 54044 ES Gallery ie Doll Ruby d4 sml jpag y a E Images E Banners Filename Window mamake aaa E Media Preview Properties Window E Templates Page Lof L Items Lto 3 of 3 Resource Manager Toolbar Tool Icon Description Back d Go back by one folder in the Folders window Forward Move forward by one folder in the Folders window Refresh Jb Refresh to retrieve newly updated files In the Folders window select the parent folder and then click the New Folder New Folder Select the image or folder to be deleted and then click the Delete button This dis plays a dialog box which reads Are you sure you want to delete the selected
126. as been granted permission or are granted Full Control permissions Jd Permission Granted Users can edit content O Permission Denied Users cannot edit content unless Full Control is granted 10 In the Delete column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per mission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot delete the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e V Permission Granted Users can delete the module O Permission Denied Users cannot delete the module unless Full Control is granted 11 In the Export column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per mission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot export the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e 4 Permission Granted Users can export the module e j Permission Denied Users cannot export the module unless Full Control is granted 12 In the Import column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per mission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot import the module
127. ate Name text box the name of the exported page is displayed You can either use this as the name of the page template or change it to a new name 6 In the Description text box enter a description of the page you are exporting This description is exported with the page template Typically the description provides a brief overview of the page and if included it s content 7 OPTIONAL At Include Content check jy the check box to include module content OR Uncheck a the check box to add the modules without any content i 8 Click the 45 Export button This displays a message with the path where the page template has been created Export Page Folder Templates Tem plate Name Members Description Information page on how and why to become a club member Template includes content amp 9 Include Content Export a Cancel The Export Page page File Manager Folders Standard File System Cc Add Folder Ka Delete Folder F Synchronize Files Recursive E Refresh 23Cony Files Move Fi Upload Mdelete Files File Name Date Size La Root E Default page template 16 10 2007 13 32 39 A 154328 banners Members page template 07 02 2008 13 55 27 A 9 274 iJ Cache q i P E S zx clipart he exported page is saved in the site s File Manager Importing a New Page How to add a new page using the Import function This enables you to apply a page template that has previously been expor
128. aximized Module content is displayed maximized and the Minimize button is displayed e Minimized Module content is hidden minimized and the Maximize button is displayed e None Module content is displayed No button is displayed O Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon vs Alignment 9 Color Border Colla pse Expand Link Type None File A File On Your Site System Image Left Center Right Not Specified lightgray Maximized Minimized None ts Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title Web Slice Expires Web Slice TTL Module Container Cache Time secs MyWebslice 7 31 2010 Calendar 10 Host Site lt Use Page Default A Preview 0 5 At Display Container check p the check box to display the module container 6 Click the Update link lH Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type None File A File On Your Site System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color lightgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None v Display Container Allow Print
129. ayed on the site Note The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled See About Content Localization 1 2 10 Maximize xx the Control Panel On the RibbonBar select the Common Tasks tab and then select T New OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and then select Add Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section In the Page Name text box enter a name for the page If this page is displayed in the menu this will be the name in the menu At Template Folder select the folder of your File Manager where the template is located This will ena ble the template field below and populate the drop down list with all templates within this folder At Page Template select a template from the drop down list Complete the remaining basic settings as required Basic Settings for New Pages In the Localization section select the required option See Localization Settings for New Pages OPTIONAL Complete advanced page settings as required Setting Advanced Settings for New Pages Click the 45 Update link Min Page Settings El Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this page mm Bi Taka kuah Page Name Testers t Page Title Ecozany Product Testers Description Keywords p Tags Parent Page eNone Specified gt Before After Add to Enc Insert Page Before After U Add to End Template F
130. base ASQl Express EcoZany Enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located if using Oracle enter the Data Source SID Enter the Database name Check this if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security which means you will be using your Windows account to access SOL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will mast likely need to check this option If you have been given a Userld Password to access your Database leave this unchecked and provide the Userld Password combination Check this if you are running the database as Database Owner if left unchecked you will be running as the User ID specified Enter an optional prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes a Previous E Next Step Four The Run Database Installation Scripts page The installation of the database scripts will be running with the results displaying in the window below When the Installation of Database Complete message displays in the window the Next button will be enabled once you are able to continue with the installation 1 Click the Next mp mast button DotNetNuke COMMUNITY 4 Run Database Installation Scripts The installation of the database scripts should have started when this page loaded The Next button will be disabled until the Installation of the Scripts is complete Completed Installing Database Scripts Installing
131. be redirected to once you com plete this importing a Select View Imported Page to be redirected to the newly created page upon creation Import b Select Edit Imported Page to be redirected to the Page Settings page of the newly created page upon creation Import This enables you to configure the page settings immediately 10 Click the Import link Tip View the new page to ensure that any modules that are set to display on all pages are not duplicated This may occur if the selected template includes modules that are displayed on all pages Import Page f Folder Templates Y Template lt None Specified TA Import Mode 9 Create a new Page Replace the current Page t Page Name Parent Page lt None Specified Before After Add to End Insert Page Home TA Redirect Mode 8 View imported Page Edit imported Page Cimpor cance Replacing the Current Page with a Page Template Import Page How to replace the modules on the current page with a page template This option is only available on the Icon bar control panel 1 Maximize xx the Control Panel 2 On the RibbonBar go to the Current Page tab and select Import OR On the Iconbar go the Page 1 Functions section and select nd Import 2 At Folder select the folder of your File Manager where the template is located This will enable the tem plate field below and populate the drop down list with all templates within
132. button and select the font color ii At Italics select from these options e Normal No italics e Italics Italics text leans forward e Oblique Oblique italics text leans backwards iii At Small Caps select from these options e Normal No capitalization e Small Caps Small capitalization Deleting a Table How to delete a table from the RADEditor OPTION ONE 1 Click on the corner of the table to select it 2 Strike the Delete button on your keyboard OPTION TWO 1 Click on the corner of the table to select it 2 Right click to view the drop down menu 3 Click the Delete Table i button OPTION THREE 1 Place your cursor before or after the table 2 Strike either the Backspace or Delete button on your keyboard respectively Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Introduction Insert your introductory summary here Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data Sample data pM AA AASA SS Conclusion insert your conclusion here Delete Table aii Design 4 HTML Wonk 39 Characters 248 2 Deleting a Table Managing Templates Inserting a Template How to insert a template using the RADEditor 1 Place you cursor where you want to insert the template 2 Click the Template Manager lai button This opens the Template Manager 3 Navigate to
133. ccess Using Security Roles 301 About the Security Roles Module 301 About Security Roles in DNN aaa aaa aa a a a aa aa aaa a aaa aa aaa aaa aaa 301 About Security Role Settings 302 Adding a Security Role Basic Settings 302 Creating a Membership Service 304 Editing a Security ROole eea eaaa a a aaa aaa aa a aa aa aaa aa aaa aaa aaa 306 Deleting a Security Role a 207 Adding a Role Group 208 Editing a Role Group 309 Deleting a Role Group aaa cnc ec a a aa a aa a a aaa aa aaa a aaa aa aaa aaa 309 Editing a User s Security Role Access 310 Setting Module Permissi0nNsS aa aaa a aa a a a a aa a aaa a aaa aee 311 Setting Page Permissions 1 1 1 1 aa a 313 Managing User Accounts 318 About the User Accounts Module 318 Enabling Disabling User Registration 218 Adding a User Account 319 Editing a User Account 0 00 0002000000000 000000 SANA NANANA a NA NANANA NANA sasaksakin 221 Unauthorizing a User Account 322 Authorizing An Unauthorized User 324 Deleting a User Account 324 Adding a User to a Security Role ea a cece ec aa aa aa aaa aaa 325 Editing a User s Security Role Access 0 0 0202 cccccccccccccccccccccecececeeeeseeeseseees 326 Deleting a User from a Security Role 327 Forcing a Password Change 328 Managing a User Profile 328 Managing a User s Password
134. ccounts can be created for Vendors in the Vendors module These accounts are used for tracking advertising of this site on other web sites DNN generates the link for other web sites to use so that it can track each time a visitor clicks through to the portal from an advertising site so that the difficulty in col lecting information for commissions to be paid can be easily managed Adding an Affiliate Referral Account How to add affiliate referral account to a vendor in the Vendors module This generate a link which affiliates can add to their web site The number of clicks and acquisitions for the link is tracked within the Affiliate Referral module permitting the tracking of commission owing to the vendor 1 Locate the required vendor account by selecting a filter or by doing a search 2 Click the Edit button beside the required vendor account This opens the Edit Vendors page 3 Maximize the Affiliate Referrals section This displays any affiliate referral accounts associated with this vendor 4 Click the Add New Affiliate link 5 OPTIONAL At Start Date click the Calendar link and select a start date 6 OPTIONAL At End Date click the Calendar link and select an end date 7 In the Cost Per Click CPC text box enter the advertising charge CPC is the commission paid to the vendor when a visitor is referred to your site 8 In the Cost Per Acquisition CPA text box enter the advertising charge CPA is the commission
135. ch the image will be displayed as At Border Color click the Color Picker button and select the border color Note A Border Width must be entered to display the border In the Border Width text box enter the pixel width for the border OR use the Increase and Decrease arrows In the Alt Text text box enter the alternative text for this image In the Long Description text box enter the long description for this image At Image Alignment click the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment for this image 10 At Margin set any of these fields 1 In the Top text box enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the top margin 2 In the Bottom text box enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the bottom margin 3 In the Right text box enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the right margin 4 In the Left text box enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the left margin 11 At CSS Class select a class for this image 12 Click the OK button Properties Width Height Border Color Border Width Alt Text Grace Doll Long Description Handmade Grace rag doll Image Alignment Image Src Portals Images Bann si Top 5 Right 5 Margin Bottom 5 Left C55 Class MormalRed OK Cancel Editing an Image Map How to edit an image map using the RADEditor Select the map
136. check box if the vendor account is authorized OR Uncheck j the check box if the vendor account is not authorized This setting enables Administrator s to easily identify unauthorized vendors however it doesn t prevent current banners from displaying in the Banners module 9 In the Vendor Classification section the follow optional fields are available but are not functional a In the Classifications box define the classifications for the Vendor This setting is not currently enabled b In Key Words text box enter key words for the Vendor 10 Click the Update link z i Edit Vendors g Vendor Details Company DNNangel g La st Na me YO un g th Email Address lorraine young dnnangel com a Address Details 9 Street 100 DotNetNuke Way F Unit a City Melbourne F Country Australia E Region Victoria E 9 Postal Code 3000 F Telephone 61 3 9000 9000 F Cell E 9 Fax 61 3 9000 9111 E a Other Details YA Website www dnnangel com File Location Root hi File Name Logo Mone Specified gt Upload New File amp 9 Authorized diting a vendor account Deleting a Vendor Account How to permanently delete a vendor account from the Vendors module 1 Locate the required vendor account 2 Click the Edit button beside the required vendor 3 Click the Delete link This displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item
137. chor name gt lt a gt 3 Edit the anchor name as required Linking to an Anchor How to create a link within the current copy by using an anchor using the RADEditor This tutorial used an exist ing anchor See Creating an Anchor 1 Highlight the text object to be linked to the anchor 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K button This opens the Hyperlink Manager OPTIONAL In the Link Text text box enter edit the link text as required At Existing Anchor select the anchor name OPTIONAL At Target select the target for this link OR Select None to use the existing window SM UE ee MO OPTIONAL In the Tooltip text box enter the text to be displayed when a user mouses over the link 7 OPTIONAL At CSS Class select the CSS class to use 8 Click the OK button Deleting an Anchor How to delete an anchor bookmark from the RADEditor OPTION ONE Use this option when the anchor has been created by first selecting text or an object 1 Select the linked text or object 2 Click the Remove Link CTRL SHIFT K button OPTION TWO Use this option when the anchor has been added to the editor by placing the cursor in a loca tion 1 Select the HTML tab 2 Locate and delete the anchor HTML which will look something like a name anchor name gt lt a gt Managing Tables Inserting a Table How to insert a table using the RADEditor 1 Place you cursor where you want to insert the table 2 Click the
138. computer where the Database is located If using Oracle enter the Data Source SID At Filename enter the name of the Database File located in the App Data Directory At Integrated Security select from these options e Check the check box if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security which means you will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option e Uncheck the check box if you have been given a UserId Password to access your Data base and provide the UserId Password combination i At User ID enter the UserID for the Database 11 At Password enter the Password for the Database At Run as db Owner select from these options e Check jg the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner e Uncheck r4 the check box you will be running as the User ID specified OPTIONAL At Object Qualifier enter a prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes e or SQL Server 2005 2008 Database a In the Server text box enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located If using Oracle enter the Data Source SID In the Database text box enter the Database name At Integrated Security select from these options e Check jm the check box if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security and will be using your Windows account to access S
139. content is typically edited on modules however this is not applicable to all modules For detailed information on editing content for individual module types see the Managing Individual Modules section of this manual Tip If the Control Panel ensure EDIT mode ts selected Editing modules with a single content item such as the HTML and IFrame modules 1 Select P Edit Item from the module menu OR click the P Edit Item link typically located at the base of the module This opens the Edit page for this module 2 Editthe fields 3 Click the po Update link Textil TM Eje J Edit Text E amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl Syndicate lante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere x4 Help B Online Help n primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia o Print Editing modules with multiple items such as the Announcements and Links modules 1 Click the Edit button located beside the content to be edited This opens the edit page for this module 2 Editthe fields 3 Click the 45 Update link Y Links o DotMetNuke Website d Project Downloads 4 Resource Directory Pion a User Group Link Exchange add Link Related Topics e See Editing Translating Localized Module Content e See Editing the Content of Shared Modules Deleting Module Content How to delete module content This tutorial demonstrates how content is typical
140. cts Projects include Modules Providers Utility Core and Components which are developed and maintained by the core team and are available for free At the time of writing only the Modules section was completed You can visit the project page of a module by clicking on module name on the Modules tab e About Provides information about the Solutions Explorer and Snowcovered com How to display DNN Solutions using the Feed Explore module 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Go to the Feed Explorer Settings section 3 At Content Source select DotNetNuke Solutions Explorer 4 Click the Update link 2 O Feed Explorer Products DotMetNuke com Professional Edition Community Edition About Buy Online Demo de 14 DOTNETNUKE DOWNLOAD FORUI PARTHERS NEWS ABOUT PRODUCTS DEVELOPMENT COMMUNITY SUPPORT You are here Products Professional Edition Professional Edition Datasheet Attend a Webinar View Case Studies Displaying News in the Feed Explorer How to display news using the Feed Explorer module This displays news from Yahoo Google and BBC news images video maps and more Yahoo Google and BBU News are a preset Content Source option 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button 2 Go to the Feed Explorer Settings section 3 At Content Source select DotNetNuke Solutions Explorer 4 Click the Update
141. d Specify Class E J E Portal Root Filename ize am TT E D acuments EcoZany avi 197120 EJ Exports EJ Gallery E Images This property specifies or Media retrieves a value indicating Miro 4 whether the user can C Templates toggle playback an and aff by clicking the video Image Height 150 Align Baseline Properties PM dha EH Yes Ma Inserting Images How to insert an image using the RADeditor 1 2 2 Click the Image Manager CTRL G button This opens the Image Manager Navigate to and select the required image See Using the Resource Manager OPTIONAL Use the Best Fit Actual Size Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to modify the previewed image these changes cannot be saved OPTIONAL Click the Image Editor button to edit the image See Working with the Image Editor OPTIONAL Click the Properties tab and set image properties See Setting Image Properties Click the Insert button Image Manager ELS CEU ES Image Editor lt Portal Rootlma es Products AbbeyDoll jpq 4 Portal Raat Filename Size F Documents Ba Doll Grace001 sml png 234539 Exparts AbbeyDolljpg 100829 Gallery E Doll Ruby d4 smljpg 54044 Images Banners Products Media Templates Preview gt Page 1 of 1 Items 1to 3 of 3 Editing an Image How to edit an image inserted in the RADeditor Rich Text Editor 1 Select the im
142. d content Outdent selected content Create a numbered list Tool Icon Description Bullet List g Create a bullet list Other Click to show or hide all table borders This is useful where table bor ders are not displayed Click to open the XHTML Validator window At the very top of the XHTML Validator E window select the radio button to set the type of XHTML validation you wish to perform This displays the validation results and details Show Hide Borders Paragraph Toolbar The Paragraph toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Tool Icon Description SuperScript x Transforms selected content to superscript Subscript Transforms selected content to subscript New Paragraph Inserts a new paragraph Insert Groupbox Inserts a group box Use to layout forms and to label sections of your content Horizontal Rule Inserts a horizontal line Insert Date Inserts the current date according to your computer Insert Time Inserts the current time according to your computer Enables you to insert and format a block of code and have it render as text See Format Code Block Formatting Code Block Resources Toolbar The Resources toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Per yor Tool Icon Description Opens the Image Manager which enables you to insert images Image Manager CTRL G into the Editor The properties tab enables you to set properties of the image to be inserted Opens the
143. d may be granted rights to view pages and modules which are only displayed to logged in users Registered user accounts can be set as either Authorized or Unauthorized If an account is Unauthorized then the user cannot access pages modules which are restricted to this role This role cannot be deleted or modified e Subscribers All Registered Users are automatically added to this role upon registration i e this role is set as Auto Assignment Authenticated users can unsubscribe or re subscribe to this role under Membership Services on the My Profile module The Administrator can choose to delete this role or change its settings as required This role cannot be deleted Security Role Groups The following terms are used throughout the DNN application They refer to groups of users as well as their status e All Users All Users refers to all site visitors regardless of whether they are logged in or registered on the site This term is used on page and module setting pages to enable them to be set as accessible to all users This term is not used on the Security Roles module e Authenticated Users An authenticated user is a registered user who is logged into the site e Unauthenticated Users An unauthenticated user is a site visitor who isn t logged into the site This term is used on page settings and module setting pages but not on the Security Roles module A typical application for this user group would be to set a page or module as
144. delete or move modules import export module content print module content and view a Syndicated URL of the module content The menu also pro vides access to the Module Settings page where users can set module specific setting such as view and edit per missions and design settings can be configured Icon Name aa du z Add Edit Item Export Content Import Content Syndicate Help Online Help Print Function Add a new record to the module or edit the existing content Export content from the module This content can then be imported to a new instance of the same module type This option is not available on all modules Import content to the module Content must first be exported from another instance of the same module type This option is not available on all modules The Syndicate option enables users to view a syndicated feed of the mod ule content This feed can be downloaded to your computer or displayed in another module such as the News Feeds RSS module Syndication must be enabled on the Module Setting page of a module Displays an overview of the purpose of the module as well as basic help on using the module If Online Help is enabled a link to view more help is displayed The Host can also view technical details of the module such as the module creator and module version Opens the advanced Online Help as set by the Host in a new web site browser Note This setting may be disabled Provides a p
145. der to be deleted 2 Click on the Folder Name to select it for deletion E g Subfolder 3 Click the px Delete Folder button A dialog box asking Delete Folder Folder Location Folder Name is displayed 4 Click the OK button to confirm deletion M a File Manager Folders Standard File System v C5 Add Folder Files 2 Refresh Windows Internet Explorer ete Files Date C banners am Cache jam dipart ma Documents iMedia Cancel Deleting a folder from the File Manager Working with Files Navigating Files in the File Manager By default the File Manager displays the first ten 10 files within the selected folder inside the Files Window When there is more than ten 10 files the following options are displayed enabling you to navigate to the addi tional files as well as change the default number of files displayed e Page 1 or 4 If there is more than one page of files associated with the selected folder the number of pages and the page number of the current page will be displayed along with the Items Per Page tool e Items Per Page Select a number to change the number of files displayed in the Files Window This set ting will default to ten 10 whenever the File Manager is refreshed e Page Navigation The following navigation buttons are displayed Move First 3 button Displays the first page of files Move Previous button Displays the previous page of files Move Next button
146. dipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl In libero Vestibulum ep Import Content luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae In libero Export Content in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae Nullam porta c Syndicate 2S m jov E m M x4 Help Online Help 3 Print Lal Settings Delete amp Refresh F ip Move Top Move Up Jt Move Down T love Battom O Move Ta LeftPane O Move To RightPane Moving a module to a new position in the same pane Viewing Online Help How to view the Online Help web site associated with your site This option may not be available on your site By default this opens the free resource called DNN Online Help which is maintained by DNN Corp Here s how to read basic help on using the current module 1 Select ig Online Help from the module menu This opens the Online Help web site in a new Web site browser Text HTMI JP Edit Text amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl Syndicate nie ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere x4 Help E a Online Help primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia gt Print 4 Edit Text Viewing Online Help Refreshing Module Content How to refresh module content 1 Select e Refresh from the module menu Viewing Editing Module Settings How to access the Module Settings page of any module This page provides Page Editors and Administrators with
147. dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat facilisis Vestibulum eleifend magna quis fermentum fermentum orci justo viverra ligula id tristique est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Nam pellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee he 34 DOTNETNUKE Marketplace Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euismod in ac libero Vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sadales varius Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim Donec ut auque in tortor mattis ullamcorper et nan nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncus Publish Save ua Cancel A Preview Publishing content using the Edit Content page Rolling Back Content How to rollback to a previous content version using the HTML module Note This task requires that Workflow is NOT set to direct publish Setting a Workflow 1 2 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link Maximize the Version History section Locate the required version OPTIONAL Click the Preview 6 button to preview a version Click the Rollback Content 7 button The selected version is published immediately even if the version was initially a draft Content Staging Click the Cancel link to return lH Version History Version Date User State 8 7 3 2009 11 14 14 AM Marle
148. dule Replace Tokens Fi v Workflow Content Staging gt gt Draft gt gt Published Allows an author to manage content in a staging area before publishing it to the site V Update X Delete cancel Created By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM Last Updated By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM RadEditor About the RadEditor The RadEditor is the default Rich Text Editor RTE used in DNN 5 44 RTE s are used on the edit page of numer ous modules such as the HTML FAQ s Announcements and Events modules The RadEditor provides an extensive number text editing tools as well as managing image link and object inser tion Tools include Paste as plain Text Paste from Word Find and Replace Insert Flash Insert Page Break Max imize Editor size to full screen and customizing editor options Amongst other features the RadEditor offers superior resource image Flash etc management table man agement and table design as well as content templating than the FCK Editor Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor COMPANY INFORMATION EcoZany is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZany products are handmade All handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade FAIR TRADE EcoZany has developed a pricing structure for our products which ensures producers in developing countries are not disadvantaged gai iii ta Design lt gt HTML Words
149. dule menu This opens the Module Help page for this module 2 OPTIONAL Click the View Online Help link to view detailed help for this module online This opens the Online Help resource in a new Web site browser 3 Click the Cancel link to return to the module Links el Add Link Export Content 5 gt Import Content Syndicate TT Online Help So Print S View Source Settings Delete amp Refresh Move Viewing Module Help 7 e Module Help About The Links Module The Links Module produces a list of hyperlinks to any tab image or file on your portal or to a web page image or file on the web The links can be set to display vertically horizontal or in a drop down box The links appear alphabetically by default An indexing field facilitates custom sorting A supplemental description can be set to appear either on mouseover or on the click of a dynamically generated link Link click tracking and logged are available Add Link Add a Links module or go to an existing Links module Click Add Link At Title enter the title for the link At Link Type select URL Page or File and then at Link select or enter the required link page or file At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked optional check the box if required At Log The User Date And Time For Every Link Click optional check the box if required At Description enter a description of the Link At View Order optional enter the View Ord
150. e Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard The Typical installation method provides a quicker method of installation than the Custom method by making some typical choices during your DotNetNuke installation Step One DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Complete the following settings 1 At Select Installation Method select Typical 2 At Choose Language select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard The following languages are available English Italian French German Spanish Catalan Dutch Polish Turkish Japanese Russian and Arabic 3 Click the Next s may button E DOTNETNUKE C Forel i Viel iam 4 Lh DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Version 05 05 00 Welcome to the DotNetNuke Installation Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of your DotNetNuke Application You may navigate through the Wizard using the Next and Previous buttons On some pages you will see a third button Test This button will allow you to test the configuration before you continue to see the effects of changes The first step is to select the installation method to use and to choose the language you would like to use for the Installation v Lg O Custom The Custom installation method provides you with the ability select Installation Method to completely customise your DotNetNuke installation Select this option if you wish to control which o
151. e DNN Blue Image Header White Backgn WA Preview TA Edit Container Upload Skin Upload Container eting the Edit Skin Setting the Portal Skin How to set the default skin that is applied to all site pages including the Admin pages Tip This setting can be overridden for individual site pages by setting the Page Skin field See Page Settings Page Management for more details I Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site Ga from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled YA Portal Skin Go to the Basic Settings section Maximize the Appearance section At Portal Skin select from the following skin directories e Host Displays skins available to all sites within this DNN installation e Site Displays skins available to this site only At Portal Skin select a skin from the drop down list or select None Specified gt to use the default skin selected by the Host OPTIONAL Click the Preview link to preview the skin selected at Step 6 in a new web site browser Click the ey Update link Host Site DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width CR Preview Host Site 4 Portal Container Ed Ed etting DNN Blue Image Header White Backgrount A Preview Host Site Extropy portal A Preview it Skin 9 Host Site Extropy basic table
152. e Exporting a Page User has Add Page permission User has Manage Settings permission Enabled if page has child pages User has Manage Settings permission Enabled if page has child pages If Help URL is set See Setting the Online Help URL For Page Editors Will only update child pages which the page editor has permission to edit Mode WU View Edit Layout Common Tasks Current Page Include in menu Mf aa Copy Design to Children x love Neabled E Help Skin Use Default Site Skin Update Page Settings Actions Update Current Page Copy Actions Admin Tab Description Settings Section ui Site Settings Link to Site Settings See About the Site Settings Page P Console Link to Admin Console See Overview of the Admin Pages User Security Section Users Link to Admin Users Account See About the User Accounts Module e User Roles Link to Admin User Roles See About the Security Roles Module E Add User Link to Admin gt Users gt Add User See Adding a User Account Add Role Link to Admin User Roles Add Role See Adding a Security Role Basic Settings Manage Section Pages Link to Admin Pages See About the Tabs module ay File Manager Link to Admin gt File Manager See About the File Manager Module TO New Page Link to Admin 5 Pages 5 Add Page See Adding a Page Upload File Link to Admin gt File Manager gt Upload File See Uploading a Single File Features Section
153. e click the Image SRC button and select a background image for the table In the Id text box enter an Id reference for this table 5 In the CSS Class Layout section a Select a CSS layout design from the drop down box The design is displayed in the Preview window below At Apply Special Formats To check uncheck one or more check box to apply remove one or more styles as desired The changes can be viewed in the Preview window below 6 OPTIONAL Select a new tab to set additional properties 7 Click the OK button Table Wizard E b d Table Design Table Properties Cell Properties Accessibility Dimensions C55 Class Layout Height l p pixels telerik reTable 4 Width 90557 pixels Apply special formats to Layout Heading Row Last Row First Calumn Last Calumn Cell Spacing Cell Padding PME Alignment E Background Color d Style Builder Sy C55 Class Normal Back Image Id etting Table Properties Setting Cell Properties How to set the optional cell properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Open the Table Wizard See Inserting a Table OR Right click on an existing table and select Table Properties 2 Goto the Cell Properties tab 3 At Preview select which cells you want to set the properties of e To select a single cell click on that cell The selected cell is highlighted e To select multiple cells hold down the Ctrl k
154. e Connection 1 At Select Database select one of the following options and complete the associated settings e SQL Server 2005 Express File a At Server enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located If using Oracle enter the Data Source SID b At Filename enter the name of the Database File located in the App Data Directory c At Integrated Security select from these options e Check jy the check box if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security which means you will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option e Uncheck r4 the check box if you have been given a UserId Password to access your Data base and provide the UserId Password combination i At User ID enter the UserID for the Database 11 At Password enter the Password for the Database d At Run as db Owner select from these options e Check jm the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner e Uncheck r4 the check box you will be running as the User ID specified e OPTIONAL At Object Qualifier enter a prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes e or SQL Server 2000 2005 Database a In the Server text box enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located If using Oracle enter the Data Source SID b In the Database te
155. e Site Settings Page The Site Settings page enables Administrators to configure basic and advanced site settings including design adver tising payment DNN usability and user registration settings etc Where two or more languages are enabled on a site different site settings can be configured for each language as required SuperUsers have access to additional Advanced Settings sections called Portal Aliases SSL Settings and Host Set tings See Editing Portal Host Settings and other tutorials in the Creating and Managing Portals gt Managing Portals section of this manual See Editing Portal Host Settings Note For details on using the Stylesheet Editor see the Managing Site Design section of this manual See About the Stylesheet Editor D u Site Settings Select Language Native Name English Name English United States El Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for your site El Site Details Title My Website Description My Website 42000 Keywords DotNetNuke DNN Content Management CMS a Copyright Copyright 2009 by DotNetNuke Corporation GUID BBAB594B A350 41B8 A3C3 9190160A9EF6 El Marketing Search Engine Goe Submit Site Map URL http dotnetnukeprofessional050401 ir Submit Verification Create Banners amp None Site Host Appearance El Advanced Settings In this section you can set up more advanced setti
156. e enabled Maximize the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Other Settings section At Administrator select the display name of the required administrator S XR Click the T Update link a Other Settings Administrator Administrator Default Language English United States UTC 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tjuana Setting the Default Language How to set the default language of this site This language is allocated to site members upon registration as well as when a regional language selected by a user is unavailable Note Changing the default language doesn t update the language allocated to existing users Only English US is supplied by default however other languages are freely available from the DotNetNuke com web site For more on languages See About the Languages Module l Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site wi from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled Maximize the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Other Settings section At Default Language select the default language Ii S E Click the Update link a Other Settings t Administrator Administrator LLL Default Language C English United States gt UTC 08 00 Pacific Time USA Canada Tijuana Setting the Portal TimeZone How
157. e first edition of the Remedial Massage Centre newsletter This month we have a number of great new offers to whet your appetite Including 20 off Remedial Massage for all out subscribers A Basic Newsletter as received by a recipien Sending a Newsletter with Tokens How to send a newsletter that includes replacement tokens using the Newsletters module Tip If your message includes TOKENS you must check the Replace Tokens check box and set the Send Method field to TO One Message Per Email Address Personalized 1 Go to the Basic Settings section and complete the following fields a At Addressees complete one or both of these options 1 At User Role s check Fj the check box for each role to receive the newsletter Note Users in multiple roles only receive one copy of the newsletter ii In the Additional Emails text box enter each of the email addresses to receive the news letter separated by a semi colon E g JohnBlack d omain com JulieBlack domain com b OPTIONAL In the From text box enter modify the email address to be displayed in the From field of this newsletter If you are logged in to the site the email address associated with your user account is displayed here by default c OPTIONAL In the Reply To text box enter the reply to email address for the email d In the Subject text box enter a subject title for the email e In the Message section enter the body of the newsletter into the edito
158. e groups It also permits authorized user to manage users within roles Security Roles KA Filter By Role Group Global Roles gt Name Description Fee Every Period Trial Every Period Public Auto P Administrators Portal Administration E m i Join this free service to receive our online magazine ga Monthly Online if o pues each month including monthly prize draw discount Magazine coupons and more P zs Nendelier subscribe ta our monthly newsletter on what s new in wholistic medicine and our latest classes P i Registered Users Registered Users PF Subscribers A public role for portal subscriptions add New Role Grou add New Role GS User Settings About Security Roles in DNN Default Security Roles The Security Roles module has three 3 default Security Roles Administrators Registered Users and Subscribers e Administrators Members of this role have full access to manage this site This includes access to add delete and edit all pages and modules on the site Members of this role also have access to the Admin pages which enable users to access all of the Site Administration modules which other users can be authorized to access as well as the additional Pages Solutions Explorer What s New Pages and Site Settings pages This role cannot be deleted or modified e Registered Users Everyone who is a registered user of this site is a member of this role Members of this role can manage their User Profile an
159. eck box to set different permissions for viewing this module than set for the page it is located on If you choose to uncheck this option the check boxes at View Module will become available 7 In the View or View Module column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot view the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions Note Users with Edit Module permissions in DNN Community Edition cannot view the module e V Permission Granted Users can view the module Q Permission Denied Users cannot view the module unless Full Control is granted 8 If you are using DotNetNuke Community Edition Skip to Step 14 9 In the Edit Content column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot edit content unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control permissions dv Permission Granted Users can edit content O Permission Denied Users cannot edit content unless Full Control is granted 10 In the Delete column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per m
160. econdary Language Manage Settings About Page Permissions How to set access to view edit and manage pages and page content setting permissions by roles and or user names This tutorial provides an overview of the different page permissions available For full details See Setting Page Permissions IMPORTANT In DNN Community edition page management permissions consist of only two settings View Page and Edit Page In DNN Professional page management has ten permissions Professional Edition Permissions Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Here is the full list of page permissions available in Professional Edition View View permissions enable users to view the page Add Users with Add permissions for a page can add child pages to that page They cannot add any parent pages and they cannot add child pages to any other pages Add Content Users with Add Content permissions for a page can edit content on the page These users can add move and delete modules as well as manage the content and settings for modules on the page Copy Users with Copy permission can make a copy any page they can view The new page can only be a child of the page they have copy permissions for Delete Users with Delete permissions can delete the page If the page has child pages they are also deleted when the parent is deleted however the user does not automatically have Delete permissions for these child pages Export Users with Export
161. ed to each vendor and can be dis played on pages using the Banners module About the Banners Module They can also be displayed in a skin using the BANNER token which is controlled by Administrators See Enabling Disabling Banner Advertising Affiliate Referrals The Vendors module can be set up to track commission for banner advertising on other portals and the commissions received for banner advertisement on the portal hi i Vendors m Search Records per Page Name f 10 Address Telephone il Authorized Banners P DotNetNuke shaun walker dotnetnuke com D _ Vendor steven james vendors com 0 Page lofi Delete Unauthorized Vendors pP Add New Vendor The Vendors Module Vendor Accounts Adding a New Vendor How to add a vendor account using the Vendors module Note Mandatory fields are indicated with an asterisk Where a check box is displayed beside a field uncheck j the check box to make the field optional or check mm the check box to make the field mandatory 1 Select Add New Vendor from the module menu OR Click the Add New Vendor link This opens the Edit Vendors page 2 In the Vendor Details section complete all of these fields a In the Company text box enter the company name of the vendor b In the First Name text box enter the first name of the contact person for the vendor c In the Last Name text box enter the last name of the contact person for the vendor d In the Email
162. ee Adding a Module to all Languages or Adding Modules to a Secondary Language Only as required 1 Maximize the Control Panel 2 On the RibbonBar select the Common Tasks tab and at Add Module select New OR On the Iconbar go the Module Insertion section and select Add New Module 3 At Module select the module to be added E g HTML Pro 4 OPTIONAL In the Title text box enter a Title for the module E g Products If no title is entered the name of the module is used by default E g About Us 5 OPTIONAL At Visibility select from the following options e Same As Page This sets the module as visible to all roles users who can view this page This is the default setting e Page Editors Only The sets module as only visible only to the roles user who can edit this page Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module 6 OPTIONAL At Pane select the pane you want to insert the module into The module is added to the Con tent Pane by default The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page If you select a pane other than the Content Pane the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page 7 OPTIONAL At Insert select the placement of the module from the first drop down box One or more of the following options is available depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane e Top Select to add the module above al
163. ee Inserting a Table OR Right click on an existing table and select Properties 2 Go to the Table Properties tab and set any of these optional settings 3 In the Dimensions section a In the Height text box set the table height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase gt and Decrease buttons The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol 96 into the text box E g Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels or enter 100 to set the height as 100 Leave blank for no spec ified height b In the Width text box set the table width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height Leave blank for no specified width 4 In the Layout section a g h In the Cell Spacing text box enter a number to set the pixel spacing between cells OR Use the Increase and Decrease buttons v In the Cell Padding text box enter a number to set the pixel padding between cells OR Use the Increase and Decrease buttons At Alignment click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the table alignment At Background Color click the Color Picker lt button and select the background color At Style Builder click the Style Builder button and build one or more styles See Using the Style Builder At CSS Class select a class for the content of this table At Back Imag
164. efault class Click the OK button Adding a Page Link How to insert a link to a site page using the RADEditor 1 8 Q Highlight the text object for the link OR Place you cursor where you want to insert the link Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K button This opens the Hyperlink Manager At Page select the site page to link to This displays the page URL in the URL field In the Link Text text box enter edit the text for this link Note This option isn t available for images and media OPTIONAL At Target select the target window for this link OPTIONAL At Existing Anchor select an existing anchor OPTIONAL In the Tooltip text box enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user mouses over this link OPTIONAL At CSS Class select a class for the link OR Select Clear Class to use the default class Click the OK button Adding a URL Link How to insert a link to a URL located on another web site using the RADEditor 1 JA 8 Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K 2 Highlight the text object for the link OR Place you cursor where you want to insert the link button This opens the Hyperlink Manager In the URL text box enter the URL address for this link In the Link Text text box enter edit the text for this link Note This option isn t available for images and media OPTIONAL At Target select the target window for this link OPTIONAL In the Tooltip text box enter a tool
165. elds marked with a red arrow are required Note Regisir aton my take several seconds Once you clot He Register button pease wait unti the system responds User Name JoSmith First Name Joanne Last Name Smith Display Name Hot Shot Email Address jo domain com Enter a password O Password IIIIITI a Confirm Password a Register igning up as a Registered User Signing up as a Registered User with a Security Code How to sign up to become a registered user of a site when a security code is required Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required y button 1 Click the Register link typically located in the top right corner of each page This opens the User Reg istration page 2 In the User Registration section complete all of these fields a In the User Name text box enter a user name Your user name is private and cannot be changed b In the First Name text box enter your first name c In the Last Name text box enter your last name d In the Display Name text box enter the name you want to be displayed to other site members e In the Email Address text box enter a valid email address 3 In the Enter a Password section complete all of these fields a In the Password text box enter your password Note Passwords are case sensitive b In the Confirm Password text box re enter your password c At Security Code enter the code displayed as a picture in the text box be
166. eline Left Top Ma Color Preview Properties Insert Cancel gt Page Lof L Items Lta lof 1 nserting Flas Inserting Media How to insert media such as sound and movie files using the RADEditor 1 Click the Media Manager button This opens the Media Manager 2 Navigate to and select the required media See Using the Resource Manager 3 OPTIONAL Click the Properties tab and set the properties a At Specify Class ID select from these options e Check jm the check box to set a class for this media This reveals the Class ID text box i In the Class ID text box enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash ii Uncheck p the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set e Uncheck the check box to use the default class b In the Width text box enter the pixel value to set the media width Leave blank to use the actual media size c In the Height text box enter the pixel value to set the media height Leave blank to use the actual media size d At Align select the alignment e At Properties select a property to view more information on that property and select Yes or No as required Repeat for each property as required 4 Click the Insert button Tip You cannot edit the properties of media once it has been inserted To modify media simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties Media Manager 7 B Uploa
167. enables inline title editing Title Owner Test Category Modified Date Size P Enrollment Form Pablo Emmanuel Forms 5 2 2008 3 29 KB P Health Benefits Claims Albert Skittle Forms 5 2 2008 12 56 KB P Yoga Timetable Lorraine Young Timetables 5 2 2008 3 03 KB P Add New Document 3 Edit the title Click the Update J button to save your changes OR Click the Cancel B button to cancel your changes aja Document List Title Owner Test Category Modified Date Size P Enrollment Form Pablo Emmanuel Forms 5 2 2008 3 29 KB P Health Benefits Claims Albert Skittle Forms 5 2 2008 12 56 KB P d Yoga Timetable Lorraine Young Timetables 5 2 2008 3 03 KB P Add New Document Adding Module Content How to add content to a module This tutorial demonstrates how content is typically added to modules however this is not typical of all modules For detailed tutorials on add content to different module types see the Man aging Individual Modules and Advanced Site Management sections of this manual Tip If the Control Panel is displayed ensure EDIT mode is selected 1 Select P Add Item from the module menu OR Click the P Add Item link typically located at the base of the module 2 Complete the form fields 3 Click the po Update link a Help Online Help Discussion Forum d Community Events Link Exchange Editing Module Content How to edit module content This tutorial demonstrates how
168. ens the Admin 5 User Account page See About the User Accounts Module Roles Opens the Admin Security Roles page See About the Security Roles Module ay Files Opens the Admin gt File Manager page See About the File Manager Module x Help Opens the Online Help resource associated with the site CMe Extensions Opens the Admin gt Extensions page See About the Extensions Module Mode View Edit Layout admin of Host Page Functions Add New Module Add Existing Module Common Tasks paga m t Module lt Select A Module gt bi Pane ContentPane pap gl Add Settings Delete Title Insert Bottom Users Roles L19 a nd Visibility Same As Page jad j x oe Copy Export Import dp Add Selected Module To Page Files Help Extensions Maximizing Minimizing the Control Panel How to maximize or minimize the main section of the Control Panel This functionality isn t available to Module Editors The default visibility is set by Administrators Setting Control Panel Visibility 1 In the top right hand corner of the Control Panel select from these options e Click the Minimize button to hide the Control Panel e Click the Maximize button to display the Control Panel Mode View Edit Layout 3 admin af Host 5 J View Edit Layout ff Admin i Host O Common Tasks Current Page Host Name Add Module Module HTML Pra Pane ContentPane Template Default Include in menu IM T
169. enu 2 Mouse over the Move option 3 Select Move To PaneName from the available options The pane names and number of panes listed depends upon the panes included in the skin set for this page Typical options are e Move To TopPane e Move To LeftPane e 7j Move To ContentPane e fy Move To RightPane e Move To BottomPane Tevt HTMI Ed Edit Text consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl Import Content sum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere Export Content Help in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia x4 Online Help so Print nay Settings Delete e8 Refresh O Move To TopPane O Move To LeftPane O Move To RightPane O Move To BottomPane Moving a Module to a New Pane D Moving Module Position in Same Pane How to move a module to a new position in the same pane 1 Mouse over the module menu 2 Mouse over the Move option 3 Select a Move Position from the available options These options depend upon the number of modules located in the pane Typical options are e 5 Move Top Moves the module to the top position in this pane e 4 Move Up Moves the module down one position in this pane e m Move Down Moves the module down one position in this pane e Move Bottom Moves the module to the bottom position in this pane Text HTMI BE Edit Text onsectetuer a
170. er for the Link Click Update 1 2 3 4 5 o 7 a B Cancel View Online Help Module Information Displays the technical details of the associated module instance Organization Owner DNN Email Url Module DNN Links Version 4 0 1 Definition Links Control Source DesktopModules Links Links ascx The Module Help Page Importing Module Content How to import module content Content must first be exported from a module of the same type E g You can only import content from a Links module into another Links module Examples of modules which have import ing exporting include the Announcements Documents FAQs Help Links Media Repository Survey HTML User Defined Table and XML modules 1 Select Import Content from the module menu This opens the Import Module inke Add Link E gt Import Content Export Content x4 Help A Online Help Eal Settings Delete Hove 2 At Folder select the folder where exported file is located from the drop down list 3 At File select the file name from the drop down list 4 Click the Import link Tip If the module already contains content the inported content is merged with the existing content Import Module Folder Root File Links xml Import Cancel Moving a Module to a New Pane How to move a module to another pane on the same page 1 Mouse over the module m
171. eral DotNetNuke pages Use page level based priorities Minimum Priority for pages 4 OPTIONAL Go to the General Sitemap Settings section Here you can configure the settings that apply to all URL s included in the Sitemap a In the Exclude URL s with a priority lower than text box enter a number between 0 0 and 1 0 This option can be used to remove certain pages from the Sitemap For example you can setup a priority of 1 for a page and enter 1 here to cause the page to be excluded from the generated Site map b At Days To Cache Sitemap For select from these options e To enable Sitemap caching Select the number of days from 1 Day to 7 Days the Sitemap is cached for This stops the Sitemap from being generated every time it is requested This is espe cially necessary for big sites If your site has more than 50 000 URL s the Sitemap will be cached with a default value of 1 day e To disable Sitemap caching Set this value to zero I e o c Click the Save Sitemap Configuration link El General Sitemap Settings Configure the settings that apply to all URLs included in the Sitemap Exclude urls with a priority lower than Days to cache Sitemap for 1 Day Clear Cache Site Submission Save Sitemap Configuration oniiguring sitemap settings Setting the Sitemap Providers How to enable and configure one or more Sitemap providers to be used for your DNN site DNN comes with a default provider named coreSi
172. ermission Denied Permission to copy the page is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to copy the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 10 In the Delete column select from these options e Permission Granted Users with Delete permissions can delete the page If the page has child pages they are also deleted when the parent is deleted however the user does not automatically have Delete permissions for these child pages e j Permission Denied Permission to delete the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to delete the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 11 In the Export column select from these options V Permission Granted Users with Export permissions can export a page e j Permission Denied Permission to export the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to export the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 12 In the Import column select from these options e g Permission Granted Users with Import permissions can import a page e j Permission Denied Permission to import the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Users cannot import the page un
173. es Common Tasks Current Page Admin and Host The Common Tasks and Current Page tabs are displayed on pages where users have edit ing permissions the Admin tab is displayed to users in the Admin role and the Host tab is displayed to the Host and SuperUsers Mode View Edit Layout i P nin Host A Common Tasks Current Page Host Name Add Module Madule HTML Pro Pane ContentPane New Title Insert Bottom T Template Default Include in menu M e Existing izibili Insert After Home Visibility Same As Page l _ Add Page Add Module Actions Insert Page Insert Module Here is an overview of the four sections of the RibbonBar Common Tasks Tab Displays these commonly performed tasks Description Visible When Actions Section Link to edit current page settings Pon See Editing Page Settings User has Manage Settings permission Link to create a new page User has Add Page permission See Adding a Page See Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page via the Page Settings Page Insert Page Section New Add Adds a page to the site See Inserting a Page RibbonBar User has Add Page permission Insert Module Section Add Adds a module to the page User has Add Content permission Module See Adding a New Module and Adding an Exist Enabled if the current page is not an Edit page ing Module RibbonBar E g Page Settings Mode view Edit Layout Common Tasks Current Page
174. ese additional fields you must edit the vendor record kd i Edit Vendors g Vendor Details Company DNNangel First Name Lorraine t Last Name Young Email Address lorraine young dnnangel com a Address Details Street 100 DotNetNuke Way Unit ag 3 amp 9 City Melbaurne Country Australia 9 Region Victoria Postal Code 3000 Telephone 61 3 9000 9000 Cell Fax 61 3 9000 9111 o Eg Eg pg pg Es pn g Other Details Website www dnnangel com Update Cancel Adding a vendor accoun Editing Vendor Account Details How to edit the details of a vendor account in the Vendors module If the vendor account has just been created a logo field additional settings are available 2 3 4 5 6 7 Locate the required vendor account by selecting a filter or doing a search Click the Edit y button beside the required vendor account This opens the Edit Vendors page Edit any of the below fields as required In the Vendor Details section edit any of the required fields In the Address Details section edit complete any the address fields In the Other Details section edit complete any of the following optional fields a In the Website text box enter the Vendor s web site address E g www domain com b At Logo select or upload a logo for this vendor See the Common Tools gt Link Control section for more details c At Authorized check jy the
175. ess 5 Click the T Update link Manage Profile u Ez Manage Password u Manage Profile 2 Manage Services WA User Name Rosie First Name Rose Last Name Booth Display Name Rosie O O O Email Address rose boothigecozany X UnRegister i Update Managing your User Credentials Managing your User Profile How to manage all your personal user details including your name contact details biography photo time zone and preferred locale The fields used in this example are typical for a US based site however sites in other coun tries will typically use local names for address fields etc You can also set the visibility of each field Public sets a field as visible to anyone who is able to view your user profile Members Only sets a field as visible to authen ticated site members Admin Only sets a field as visible to Administrators only Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required 3 button 1 2 Login to the site Logging into a Site Click on your Display Name link typically located in the top right corner of the site OR Navigate to a My Profile module This displays the My Profile page Click the Edit Profile link Click the 23M anage Profile link 5 Complete or edit any of the following fields and select the Visibility of each field a In the Prefix text box enter a prefix for the name E g Mrs b In the First Name text box enter the first name E g Elizabeth
176. et installed Select Installation Method Typical The Typical installation method makes some typical choices for you amp Auto The Auto installation method bypasses the Wizard completely and uses the legacy Auto Install procedure Choose Language English Step Two Installing DotNetNuke The installation Status Report will run Once the installation is completed the Installation Complete message is dis played 1 Click the Click Here To Access Your Portal link to go to the newly installed portal Note The Host and Administrator accounts use default details which require immediate updating See Changing your Password Host Account Username host Password dnnhost Administrator Account Username admin Password dnnadmin gt DOTNETNUKE 9 COMMUNITY d Installing DotNetNuke Version 05 05 00 Installation Status Report 00 00 00 017 Installing Version 05 00 00 00 00 00 021 Executing Script DotNetNuke Schema SqlDataProvider Success 00 00 04 285 Executing Script DotNetNuke Data SqlDataProvider Success 00 00 05 206 Installing MemberRole Provider 00 00 05 207 Executing Script InstallCommon 00 00 06 043 Executing Script InstallMembership 00 00 06 595 Executing Script InstallProfile 00 00 07 093 Executing Script InstallRoles 00 00 07 636 Upgrading to Version 05 02 03 00 00 07 655 Executing Script 05 00 01 5qIDataProvider Success 00 00 08 616 Execut
177. ether it ts for an individual module or you wish to set the default for the site an HTML module must first be added to some page on your site 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 4 button 2 Go to the HTML Module Settings section 3 At Workflow select the workflow you wish to use from these options e Direct Publish With the direct publish workflow any content that is saved on the Edit Con tent page or through the inline editor will be immediately visible to all users with permissions to view the module Editing users will be able to see the content for both view and edit mode e Content Staging Content staging allows content to be saved as a draft before it is published Draft content will only be visible when edit mode is selected by users who can edit the mod ule page In view mode the most recent published version of content will be displayed instead of the draft This is the same for users with view permissions only Publishing a Draft e Content Approval Content Approval is similar to Content Staging but it adds an extra Ready for Approval state between the draft and published states This allows reviewers to monitor and either approve or reject any content added before it is actually published to the site Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 4 Click the Update link El HTML Module Settings f Help In this section you can set up settings that are specific for this mo
178. ext box OR Delete the existing text and paste in your own text Click the Update link The sample below shows how to create the Tabs Sections and items in the Feed Explorer You can add as many Tabs Sections and Items as you like ttp RCEP LED http news news news news google google google google com output rss com output rss com outpurerss com output rss gt gt gt Jy gt Feed Explorer Tab One Tab Two Section 1 Section 2 Category 1 Category 2 Channel 4 News Products DotNetNuke com Martin Bell Lobbying claims shocking BBC News Martin Bell Lobbying claims shocking BBC News Three former cabinet ministers are to be suspended from the parliamentary Labour party after being recorded for a documentary on political lobbying Stephen Byers Patricia Hewitt and Geoff Hoon will be suspended following reports in the Sunday Times Labour suspends ministers over lobbying claims Reuters UK 3 former UK ministers suspended amid new scandal The Associated Press Stephen Byers and other ex ministers suspended from Labour party over lobbying The Guardian Times Online Wall Street Journal Telegraph co uk all 742 news articles In Afghanistan Karzai holds talks with key insurgent groups Washington Post Washington Post In Afghanistan Karzai holds talks with key insurgent groups Washington Post KABUL
179. ey and click on each required cell OR click the Select All link and then hold down the Ctrl key and click on one or more cells to deselect them The selected cells are highlighted 4 At Cell Properties set any of the following a In the Height text box set the cell height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol 96 into the text box E g Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels or enter 100 to set the height as 100 Leave blank for no spec ified height In the Width text box set the cell width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height Leave blank for no specified width At Content Alignment click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the align ment of content At Background click the Color Picker 4 button and select the background color At Style Builder click the Style Builder amp button and build one or more styles See Using the Style Builder At CSS Class select a class for this these cells At Back Image click the Image SRC si button and select a background image for the table In the Id text box enter an Id reference for this these cells At No Text Wrapping check jm the check box to disallow text within this these cells from wrap ping to another line OR uncheck p the check box to a
180. fessional Edition 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 7 button Go to the HTML Module Settings section Click the Manage Workflows link This opens the Manage Workflows page You can now do any of the fol lowing Go to the Workflow section Click the Add New Workflow link In the Workflow text box enter a new for this workflow In the Description text box enter a description of this workflow Click the Save link This saves the new workflow and adds the default workflow states of Draft and Pub lished Adding a Workflow State to add one or more new states to this workflow Changing the Version History Setting How to change the version history settings for a HTML module This setting applies to how many versions are kept in memory for the workflow selected Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the HTML Module Settings section Click the Manage Workflows link This opens the Manage Workflows page Maximize the Version History section 6 In the History text box enter the new number of versions to be kept in memory in the History text box If the new number is lower than what was originally set then the number of versions available will not change until content for the module has been saved content does not have to be changed just saved Click the Save link Delet
181. ff In the Description text box enter a brief description of the Security Role Group Click the Update link J Edit Role Group f Group Name Staff TA Description All staff members Update Cancel Editing a Role Group How to edit a security role group using the Security Roles module 1 At Filter By Role Group select the role group from the drop down box This displays the Edit button 2 Click the Edit button This opens the Edit Role Group page 3 In the Group Name text box edit the name of the role group 4 In the Description text box edit the role group description 5 Click the Update link gl Security Roles W Filter By Role Group Staff AX Name Description Fee Every add New Role Grou add New Role GA User Settings iting a role group Deleting a Role Group How to delete a role group from the Security Roles module Tip You must first remove all roles belonging to that role group This can be achieved by editing each role asso ciated with the Role Group and either changing the associated role group OR disassociating the role group from all roles E g selecting lt Global Roles gt If a role group has associated roles the delete option will not be displayed At Filter By Role Group select the role group from the drop down box This displays the Delete but ton Click the Delete button This displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This I
182. file The selected file may be in use If deleted some pages will not be displayed prop erly Press OK to confirm deletion Click OK to confirm Delete In the Folders window select the folder where the file will be uploaded to and Upload Upload Unload E then click the Uploa dh Asso button Folder Window This window displays the folders of the File Manager using a hierarchical tree structure Select a folder to view its sub folders and or files in the Filename Window Folders can be moved by dragging into a different folder Right click a folder to perform Delete Rename New Folder or Upload Filename Window Displays a list of the folders and or files within the selected folder Select a file to view a preview and or properties information in the Preview Properties Window Files can be moved by dragging into a different folder Right click an image or folder to perform Delete Rename New Folder or Upload Tip Click the Collapse Expand the left pane button to hide show the Folder Window This is useful once you have navigated to the required folder as it provides additional space to view files details Image Manager ncm JU Upload Image Edtor S A SEIEN e Portal RontiGallery 388 Ecazany Dolls Grace Dall Doll Gracedd2 jog Filename E source F thum bs Ba Dolls RubyGrace001 300 lt 200p png me Doll Grace00Ljpq me Doll Gracedd2jpq Collapse expand the left pane Preview Properties Window Displa
183. first date the page is viewable d At End Date click the Calendar link and select the last date the page is viewable Note Expired pages can be viewed by Administrators via the Admin Pages page See Viewing any Page Tabs Module e At Link URL to set this page to be a navigation link to another resource select or add the link here See About the Link Control f At Permanently Redirect check jm the check box to notify the client that this page should be considered as permanently moved This would allow Search Engines to modify their URL s to directly link to the resource Note This setting is ignored if the Link Type is set to None 5 Click the iy Update link Cl Advanced Settings In this Section you can set up more advanced settings for this page O Appearance Icon Link Type File A File On Your Site O System Image File Location Root File Name lt None Specified gt Upload New File La rge icon Link Type File A File On Your Site System Image File Location Root File Name None Specified Upload New File Pa ge Skin e Host Site lt Use Portal Default preview vy Page Container Host Site lt Use Portal Default preview wa Copy design to descendants Disabled E Copy design Refresh Interval seconds us Page Header Tags O Other Settings wa Secure Site Map Priority 0 5 Start Date Calend
184. for installation You can also add and select additional Providers to be installed Creating a Custom Installation Setup 1 OPTIONAL Check jm the check box beside each authentication system you want to install 2 Click the Next z yay button ax DoTNETNUI ce gt COMMUNITY Install Authentication Systems DotNetNuke supports multiple authentication systems On this page you can choose the systems you wish to install Installing an Authentication System does not automatically enable it for each portal but it makes the system available to a Portal Adminstrator Authentication Systems C ActiveDirectory 05 00 02 install Step Ten Install Providers DotNetNuke uses a provider module for extensions On this page a number of providers are automatically selected for installation You can also select additional Providers to be installed Creating a Custom Installation Setup 1 OPTIONAL Check jy the check box beside each of the providers you wish to install 2 Click the Next 4 button U DoTNerNuKce c COMMUNITY Install Providers DotNetNuke uses a provider model for extensions On this page you can choose the Providers to install Providers W ASP2Menu NavigationProvider 05 01 00 V DNN DropDownNavigationProvider 05 Ml O0 Step Eleven Instal Host Portal 1 In the Portal Administrator section complete these details a In the First Name text box enter the Administrator s first name
185. g Buffer is set to 20 items then 20 log events will need to occur before the buffer will be sent to the database 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 In the Site Log Buffer text box enter the number of items to buffer before sending them to the database 5 Click the 45 Update link c Other Settings Control Panel ICONBAR tf Site Log Storage Database File System TA Site Log Buffer 0 Days Setting the Site Log History How to set the default Site Log history time period for all new sites This setting can be managed on existing por tals via Host gt Portals Page 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the Other Settings section 4 In the Site Log History text box enter the number of days E g 20 5 Click the 45 Update link E Other Settings t Control Panel ICONBAR t Site Log Storage Database File System YA Site Log Buffer 1 Items Setting the Auto Unlock Time for User Accounts How to set the auto unlock time period following multiple unsuccessful attempts to login to a user account After an account is locked out due to unsuccessful login attempts it can be automatically unlocked with a successful authentication after a certain period of time has elapsed Enter the number of minutes to wait until the account can be automatically unlocked Enter 0
186. ge Manager a E Upload PF Image Edtor F3 F4 Portal Rootlmages Products AbbeyDoll_thumb jpq 4 Portal Root Filename Documents Ba Doll Grace001 sml png 234839 Exports ElAbbeyDolljpg 100329 Gallery im AbbeyDallthumb jpq 13352 images amp AbbevDoll thumb2 jpg 100850 Doll Ruby004 smljpg 54044 Banners Media Templates i Doll Ruby004 smi 00Ljp 54044 Preview Properties lt b Page 1 of 1 Items 1to 6 of 6 Creating an Image Map How to create an image map using the RADEditor 1 Insert an image 2 Right click on the image and click the Image Map Editor 9 button This opens the Image Map Editor window 3 To create an area a At Select Area Shape select either Rectangle or Circle b Click the New Area button This displays a gray box defining the area c Move and resize the area as required This updates the Define Area Properties fields for Left Width Top and Height d OPTIONAL In the URL text box enter the Url to open when a user clicks on this Area i At Target select the target for the Url Target No target is set and the link will open in the same window New Window Will open a new window Parent Window If web page consists of frames the link will open in the par ent frame Same Window The link will open in the same window Browser Window The link will open in the same window Search Pane Media Pane e OPTI
187. ge Password Daisy Id 25 Password Last Changed Tuesday September 04 2007 Password Expires Password does not Expire a Change Password To change a password for this user enter the new password and confirm the entry by typing it again 4 New Password Confirm Password i Change Password g Reset Password You can reset the password for this user The password will be randomly generated Reset Password Managing Vendors Banners And Affiliates About the Vendors Module The Vendors module enables authorized users to create and manage vendor accounts vendor banners and affil iate accounts This Administration module can be deployed to any site page and provides users with view per missions can view Vendor details and users with edit permissions can manage vendor accounts banners and affiliate accounts DNN comes with two Vendor directories Site Vendors and Host Vendors Site Vendors are those managed using the Vendors module on any site page and using the Admin Vendors page Details of these Vendors are unique to the site and banners cannot be displayed on other sites Host Vendors are those managed using the Vendors module on the Host Vendors page These banners are available to all portals within this DNN installation Banner Advertising Banner can be images text or script Each banner record records a number of statistics including tracking of clicks views and impressions Multiple banners can be add
188. ground Color icon to apply the used last color to the selected content Tool Apply CSS Class Icon Apply C55 CI Format Stripper Fonts and Font Size Toolbar Description Select the CSS Class to be applied to the selected content Click the Arrow icon to select the type of formatting to be stripped from the selected content The Fonts and Font Size toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Verdana Normal Tool Paragraph Style Font Name CTRL SHIFT F Real Font Size CTRL SHIFT P Formatting Toolbar px Icon Description Set the paragraph style for the selected Normal rox Set the font for the selected text Set the font size in pixels for the selected text Verdana The Formatting toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Tool Text Formatting Bold CTRL B B Italicize CTRL I Z Underline CTRL U U Strikethrough Alignment Align Left Align Center Align Right Justify Remove Alignment Indent and Lists Indent Outdent Numbered List Description Add remove bolding to selected content Add remove italics to selected content Add remove underline to selected content Add remove strikethrough to selected content Left align the selected content Center align the selected content Right align the selected content Justify align the selected content Remove alignment formatting from selected content Indent selecte
189. he Next button is enabled and you can con tinue with the installation 1 Click the Next ej ext button Au DotNerNuKe C COMMUNITY 4 Run Database Installation Scripts The installation of the database scripts should hawe started when this page loaded The Next button will be disabled until the Installation of the Scripts is complete Completed Installing Database Scripts Installing Database Version 05 00 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 00 01 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 01 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 02 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 03 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 01 04 5uccess Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 00 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 01 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 02 Success Upgrading Database to Version 05 02 03 Success Installation of Database Complete Step Five Configure Host Account 1 Complete the following Host Account details a In the First Name text box enter the first name of the Host b Inthe Last Name text box enter the last name of the Host c In the User Name text box enter a user name for the Host d In the Password text box enter a password for the Host e In the Confirm Password text box re enter the password for the Host f In the Email Address text box enter the email address of the Host 2 Comple
190. he following fields a In the Username text box enter a username for the Administrator b In the First Name text box enter the Administrator s first name c In the Last Name text box enter the Administrator s last name d In the Email text box enter the Administrator s email address e In the Password text box enter a password for the Administrator f In the Confirm text box re enter the password for the Administrator 5 Click the T Create Portal link g a Portal Setup Portal Type Parent Child Portal Alias www domain com Home Directory Portals PortallD Customize amp Title MyWebsite MyVebsite provides health and wellbeing services Description throughout inner city Melbourne Victoria Australia Our services include massage E B mywebsite massage acupuncture melbourne healt Keywords h wellbeing Template DotNetNuke Default Website Template a Security Settings Username admin First Name Jane Last Name Smith Email jane smith domain com 9 Password PEPE EE EN Confirm a a Cancel V Create Portal Note Once your portal is created you will need to login using the Administrator information specified above Adding a Parent Porta Adding a Child Portal How to add a new child portal to this DNN installation New portals are created with the default settings as defined in the Host Settings module E g host fee host space s
191. ications Text banners can be either plain text Or DotNetNuke is the leading open source web content management system WCM or CMS and application HTML Stylesh eet styles are applied development framework for Microsoft NET Hundreds of thousands of web sites worldwide use DotNetNuke as their content management system to deliver rich interactive experiences to their visitors Displaying a Banner How to display banners of a using the Banners module Banners must be added to a vendor account before they can be displayed in the module See the Vendors module for more details 1 2 Select Banner Options from the module menu At Banner Source select from these options e Site Displays banners managed on this site These banners are exclusive to this site e Host Displays banners managed on the Host site by your Host These banners are available to all sites within this DNN installation At Banner Type select one of the available the banner types Banner MicroButton Button Block Skyscraper Text or Script from the drop down box See About Banner Types The following optional settings lets you control which banners display a In the Banner Group text box enter the banner group name This sets this module to only dis play banners belonging to this group A group name can be enter when added banners OR Leave this field blank to display all banners regardless of group name b In the Banner Count text box
192. ifferent types of banners that can be associated with a vendor account and displayed using the banners module Five sizes of image banners are provided Banner MicroButton Button Block and Sky scraper The Banner Type Banner can be displayed either using a Banners module or by adding the BANNER skin object to the skin applied to the portal or to a page of the portal The BANNER skin object can be enabled or disabled on the Admin gt Site Settings page and is a portal wide setting This can be set to either Site or Host Below are examples of the industry standard sizes for banner images These sizes are recommendations only Banner 468 x 60 pixel This type of banner can be displayed either using a Banners module or it de can display where ever the BANNER Ps DOTNETNUKE skin object is included in the skin applied to a page See Ena bling Disabling Banner Advertising Micro Button 120 x 60 pixels aa E J DOTNETNUKE F 120 x 90 pixels Button 4s Lr DOT har HUE Block Professonal 125 x 125 pixels 34 ig 12 DOTNETNUKE Professional 34 Confidently Deploy DotNetNuke in Business Critical Applications Skyscraper 120 x 600 pixels J BUY NOW Script Banner Script type banners can contain java script which is executed when the banner is shown on the portal Text Banner Banners DotNetNuke Professional Edition 5 1 Confidently Deploy DotNetNuke in Business Critical Appl
193. ign link Copying Design to Children Pages f At Disabled select from these options e Check jm the check box if the page name is not a link I e When you click on the page name in the menu nothing happens Typically this option is selected for Parent pages and provides a way for users to navigate to a Child page e Uncheck r4 the check box for this page name to be a link to the page This is the default option g At Refresh Internal seconds enter the interval to wait between automatic page refreshes E g Enter 60 for 1 minute or 60 seconds Leave field blank to disable h At Page Header Tags enter any tags i e meta tags that should be rendered in the HEAD tag of the HTML for this page 3 In the Cache Settings section set the following optional setting a At Output Cache Provider select the provider to use for this page 4 Inthe Other Settings the following settings are available a At Secure select from these options e Check jm the check box to force this page to use a secure connection SSL This option will only be enabled if the host has enabled SSL See Setting Portal SSL Settings e Uncheck r5 the check box remove use of SSL connection b In the Site Map Priority text box enter the desired priority between o and 1 0 This helps determine how this page is ranked in Google with respect to other pages on your site 0 5 is the default c At Start Date click the Calendar link and select the
194. ilable Available Containers No Containers Available Available Languages No Languages Available Available Authentication Systems ActiveDirectory 05 00 02 m 7 Install Selected Extensions nstalling selected Extensions Related Topics e See Installing a New Module Installing a New Module How to install a new module to your DNN installation 1 Navigate to Host gt Module Definitions 2 Select Install Module from the module menu OR lick the Install Module link 3 On the Install New Package page complete the following fields a At Ignore File Restrictions select one of the following e Uncheck p to observe file restrictions e Check m the check box to ignore file restrictions Checking this option will display the message WARNING You have elected to ignore the check for restricted file types This action poses a possible security risk for your site and you should only do this if the package you are installing is from a trusted source b Click the Browse button and select the module zip file from your computer c Click the z Next link Install new Package Install new Package DotNetNuke can be extended in many ways This wizard helps you upload and install DotNetNuke packages The first step is to select the package you wish to install on your local computer Click the Browse button to choose the package to install When you have selected the zip package to install click the Next
195. in a staging area prior to publishing Advanced Workflow Management enables you to create your own content staging workflow s to suit your busi ness needs Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Version History Another feature added to the module which directly correlates to the workflow feature is the version history which displays information regarding each version of the HTML module s content Included in the version his tory table is the ability to preview and rollback to any of the versions listed on the table Finally an item history table contains more detailed information about the history of either the current version or the version that is cur rently being previewed Module Version 05 02 00 Minimum DNN Version 05 02 00 Text HTML Dear John Citizen Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aenean dolor erat fringilla vehicula porta non mattis ut neque Nullam rhoncus lectus et vehicula aliquam nisl metus volutpat nunc ut consequat libero turpis in urna Vestibulum porta dui non sapien sollicitudin bibendum Morbi varius lacus magna Etiam blandit rhoncus posuere Vivamus at nisi eu lectus malesuada lobortis Donec commodo neque sed enim vulputate sed ornare felis imperdiet uu Quisque venenatis tincidunt tellus in mattis libero euismod nec ye DOTNETNUKE Quisque ultrices lacus eu enim accumsan quis dapibus justo dapibus ae SAM INA Administrators Enabling Disabling Inline Editor
196. ing For Example In the below screen capture permission to view the module are inherited from the page and per mission to edit the module has been granted to all Registered Users apart from the user with the username John TA Permissions View Module Edit Module Administrators All Users Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users View Module Edit Module pen John 4 ad Username John Inherit View permissions from Page About Module Permissions How to set access to view edit and manage module content by roles and or usernames Here you will find an overview of the different module permissions available For full details See Setting Module Permissions IMPORTANT In DNN Community edition module management permissions consist of only two settings View and Edit In DNN Professional module management has seven permissions Professional Edition Module Permissions Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Here is the full list of module permissions available in Professional Edition e View Users can view the module e Edit Content Users with Edit Content permissions can edit the module content e Delete Users with delete permissions can delete the module through the module menu e Export Users with export permissions will be able to export the content of the module through the mod ule menu e Import Users with import permission can import content for the module through the module menu e
197. ing Script 05 01 00 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 11 350 Executing Script 05 01 01 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 12 091 Executing Script 05 01 02 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 12 571 Executing Script 05 01 03 5qIDataProvider Success 00 00 13 018 Executing Script 05 01 04 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 13 348 Executing Script 05 02 00 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 14 516 Executing Script 05 02 01 SqIDataProvider Success 00 00 15 204 Executing Script 05 02 02 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 15 553 Executing Script 05 02 03 5glDataProvider Success 00 00 15 957 Executing Application Upgrades 05 00 01 Success 00 00 16 193 Executing Application Upgrades 05 01 00 Success 00 00 18 519 Executing Application Upgrades 05 01 01 Success 00 00 18 525 Executing Application Upgrades 05 01 02 Success 00 00 18 525 Executing Application Upgrades 05 01 03 Success 00 00 18 784 Executing Application Upgrades 05 01 04 Success 00 00 18 784 Executing Application Upgrades 05 02 00 Success 00 00 19 014 Executing Application Upgrades 05 02 01 Success 00 00 19 028 Executing Application Upgrades 05 02 02 Success 00 00 19 028 Executing Application Upgrades 05 02 03 Success 00 00 19 030 Cleaning Up Files 05 00 01 Success 00 00 19 034 Cleaning Up Files 05 01 00 Success 00 00 19 035 Cleaning Up Files 05 01 01 Success 00 00 19 035 Cleaning Up Files 05 01 02 Success 00 00 19 035 Cleaning Up Files 05 01 03 Success 00
198. ing a Workflow How to set an existing workflow as active or inactive for the HTML module This sets the workflow as inactive on the site and removes it from the list of Workflows in the HTML Module Settings section Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ts Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the HTML Module Settings section Click the Manage Workflows link This opens the Manage Workflows page Go to the Workflow section At Workflow select the required workflow from the workflow drop down box At Deleted check the check box to set the workflow as inactive Click the Save link Editing a Workflow State How to edit an existing state in a workflow for a HTML module Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 7 button Go to the HTML Module Settings section Click the Manage Workflows link This opens the Manage Workflows page You can now do any of the fol lowing Go to the Workflow section At Workflow select the required workflow from the workflow drop down box Go to the States section Click the Edit button beside the state to be edited Go to the State Configuration section and edit any of the following as required a In the State text box edit the workflow name b At Reviewers select permissions are required c At Notify
199. ink seen 59 Configuring DotNetNuke Host Settings 61 Viewing Configuration Details 61 Configuring Host Details aa 62 Setting the Host Portal a a aa a a aa a aaa a aaa a aa a a aaa DL aa onana 62 Setting the Host Details 222 ce eee aa a aaa a a aa a aa a aaa reme aaa aaa 63 Configuring Proxy Settings 64 Configuring Proxy Settings 64 Setting the Web Request Timeout Period 2 2 2 000 aaa 64 Configuring SMTP Server Settings 65 Setting the SMTP Server and Port coco cece ccc aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 65 Testing Outgoing Email Settings 66 Other Selasa aaa ne en See AL ee ee ene mana nadn PANA 66 Setting the Site Log Storage 66 Setting the Site Log Buffer a 67 Setting the Site Log History 67 Setting the Auto Unlock Time for User Accounts 2222200 000 0 5 0 0 a aaa a aaa aaa 68 Managing Allowable File Extensions 2222000000000 000 O 0 rell 69 Enabling Disabling the Scheduler aa e cece aa a a aaa a aaa 70 Disabling Enabling Event Log Buffer aa aaa a aa a a aaa a aaa aaa 71 Setting the Online Help URL aa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a a aaa a aaa a aask kaaa 71 Enabling Disabling Online Module Help Loose 72 Creating And Managing Portals 72 74 About the Portals Page 74 Adding a Parent Portal ae ccccccccccccccecececececececececececececececececececeees
200. ions on the site Some services may require payment If this is the case you will be redirected to a payment site When you return to this site you can check back here to view your subscription EE Service Trial Expiry Name Description EE p Date Subscribe to our monthly newsletter for details of our latest products special discounts and exciting competitions HI TRI Newsletter Unsubscribe Subscribers A public role for portal subscriptions Free Free If you have been given a special RSVP code you can subscribe to these Services by entering the code in the RSVP Code field below and clicking the Subscribe button next to the field t9 RSVP Code Subscribe subscribing to a Member Service Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Code How to subscribe to a members service using an RSVP code provided by an Administrator Subscription grants you immediate access to any pages or content restricted to service subscribers 1 Login to the site Logging into a Site 2 Click on your Display Name link typically located in the top right corner of the site OR Navigate to a My Profile module This displays the My Profile page Click the Edit Profile link This displays the Manage Profile page Click the 4 Manage Services link This displays a list of the available services In the RSVP Code text box enter the code supplied to you O X x e Click the Subscribe link to the right of the RSVP Code text box This displays the following
201. is displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item 3 Click OK to confirm deletion Created Date Authorized S X 5 3 4 2007 1 35 28 PM I Prince Prince Pauper N A 9 4 2007 1 58 11 PM Page lofi add New User A Delete Unauthorized Users iManage Profile Properties S2 User Settings Adding a User to a Security Role How to add a user to a Security Role using the User Accounts module 1 Find the required user by using a filter or by performing a search 2 Click the Manage Roles button beside the required user account 3 At Security Role select the role this user is to be added to 4 OPTIONAL At Effective Date click the kii Calendar link and select the first date the user can access this role If no date is selected then access to this role is immediately granted 5 OPTIONAL At Expiry Date click the 31 Calendar link and select the last date the user can access this role If no date is selected then access to this role will not expire 6 At Send Notification select from the following options e Check jj the check box to send a notification email to the user informing them of their new role access This is the default setting e Uncheck the check box to add the user to the role without notifying them 7 Click the J Add User to Role link 8 Repeat Steps 3 7 to add this user to additional roles 9 Click the Cancel link to return to the User Accounts page z Edit Use
202. isplayed in a banners module 1 Select Banner Options from the module menu 2 At Border Width enter the pixel width of the border E g 3 3 At Border Color enter a hex number 6495ED or color code CornflowerBlue to set the color of the border 4 Click the Update link Tip You may like to uncheck j gt the Display Container option on the Settings page of this module to hide the module container t Banner Source OHost 9 Site Banner Type lt All Types gt Banner Group Banner Count 3 Orientation amp Vertical Horizontal Border Width 3 Border Color SeaGreen Cell Padding 4 Row Height Column Width Banners New plans starting at just 69 00 ca Serious Wab Hosting for Introducing Virtual Enviornments MANIMUMASP Saros Microso Developers DotNetNuke Flies Windows 2003 ASP NET 2 0 e Advanced Hosting Easy Solutions ae Hosts ASTA CLICK HERE Ib ah f Vb rho BI E B WA Uu r PL ATINLIM i ia DOTNETNUKE TE m wama DotNetNuke Done Right anelahi Feed Explorer About the Feed Explorer Module The Feed Explorer module allows users to browse RSS feeds using a tabbed user interface There is a standard for mat for the content of the module that creates the Tabs across the top of the module Sections below tabs Items down the left hand side and then displays the related content to the right of the items This module dis plays DNN information by defa
203. ission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot delete the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions div Permission Granted Users can delete the module O Permission Denied Users cannot delete the module unless Full Control is granted 11 In the Export column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per mission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot export the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e 4 Permission Granted Users can export the module e j Permission Denied Users cannot export the module unless Full Control is granted 12 In the Import column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct per mission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot import the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e 4 Permission Granted Users can import the module e j Permission Denied Users cannot import the module unless Full Control is granted 13 In the Manage Settings column click o
204. istrator In the Confirm Password text box re enter the password for the Administrator In the Email Address text box enter the Administrator s email address 2 In the Portal Properties section complete these details a In the Portal Title text box enter a title for the portal b At Template select a template for the portal 3 Click the Next s nja button EA DOTNETNUKE COMMUNITY L Portal Title In this page you will configure the Host or initial Portal website You will need to provide an administrator user account This user has access to all functionality of the portal and as with the Host User care should be taken to provide a UserName Password combination that is difficult to hack by malicious users Portal Administrator First Name Administrator Last Name Account User Name admin Password 1111111 Confirm Password 111111 Email Address admin ecozany com Portal Properties Portal Title EcoZany Template Default Website Step Seven Congratulations 1 Click the Finished Go to Site Finished Goto Site button to go to the newly installed portal EA DOTNETNUKE Congratulations Congratulations you have successfully installed DotNetNuke Finished Goto Site Creating a Custom Installation Setup DNN allows you to modify what happens during the installation process by simply adding or removing files in the Install folder During the ins
205. ite log history These settings can be modified once the portal is created When the portal is created the Administrator receives a message with the login details you have provided for them however their password is not included for security reasons 1 Navigate to Host gt Portals 2 Select J Add New Portal from the module menu OR Click the l Add New Portal link This displays the Add New Portal page 3 In the Portal Setup section complete the following fields a b B At Portal Type select Child In the Portal Alias text box enter an alias for the portal E g www domain com Child Note Child Portal names must be unique OPTIONAL In the Home Directory text box click the Customize link and enter a new location for this portals home directory relative to the DNN installation root directory Note Click the Customize link a second time to return to default setting OPTIONAL In the Title text box enter the name of the portal E g MyChildWebsite OPTIONAL In the Description text box enter description of the portal OPTIONAL In the Keywords text box enter the key words for the portal separated by a comma D At Template select a template from the drop down list 4 In the Security Settings section complete the following fields a b In the Username text box enter a username for the Administrator In the First Name text box enter the Administrator s first name In the Last Name text box enter
206. ite using the Recycle Bin module This restores the selected pages including any modules and module content on those pages prior to deletion The pages are restored to their previous location in the pages list and site menu Tip You cannot restore a page whose parent page has also been deleted unless you restore the parent page first 1 Inthe Pages window click on the name of each page to be restored 2 Click the Restore i3 button di Recycle Bin E Pages p E services Installed Modules b Account Login Banmers estoring deleted pages to the site Adding Privacy and Terms of Use Statements Configuring the Portal Language Settings How to configure language settings for a single portal 1 Go to a Languages module OR Navigate to Admin gt Languages This displays the list of available lan guages 2 Click the g Language Settings link Language Management DotNetNuke s security model requires that host users must create new languages As a site administrator you can manage existing languages If you would like more languages please contact the Host User for your site System Default English United States Site Default English United States T9 Update 9 Native Name English Name The default site language cannot be disabled Cl Enable Localized Content Static Resources Culture Enabled Site English united States P Swedish Sweden
207. itle Insert Bottom 7 Insert After Home Visibility Same As Page Add Page Add Module Insert Page Insert Module Setting Control Panel Mode How to set the mode of the Iconbar Control Panel 1 At Mode select from the following options e View View the page with module editing tools hidden This option shows you how the page appears to site visitors Mode View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE 8 dia I1 af Admin Y iA OD DOTNETNUKE ap DOTNETNUKE __ le PROFESS ONA You are here About Us Administrator Account Logout About Us O EcoZany is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZany products are handmade All handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade EcoZany has developed a pricing structure for our products which ensures producers in developing countries are not disadvantaged e Edit Displays all module editing tools available to the current user E g Module menu add edit links Settings button Important This option must be selected to edit the page Mode View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE Asiae S Wr r Admin a O dg DOTNETNUKE aY PROFESSION tc DUR TO F ABOUTUS ADMIN LEN lt You are here About Us Administrator Account Logout About Us e O EcoZany is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZany products are handmade All handmade prod
208. k Creating a Unique Copyright Notice How to create a unique copyright notice for this site The copyright notice displays on pages where the applied skin contains the Copyright skin object In the default DNN skin the copyright notice appears at the bottom each page l Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site UG from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings Site Details section 4 In the Copyright text box enter your copyright text Copyright Copyright C 2005 2007 My Website 5 Click the qp Update link ptNetNuke is copyright 2002 2007 by DotNetNuke Corporation A Unique Copyrig t Notice Appearance Setting the Site Logo How to set the logo for this site The site logo displays on pages where the applied skin contains the Logo skin object A site logo is typically displayed in the top left corner of all site pages as it is in the default DNN skins Navigate to Admin Site Settings OR Select Site We from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings section 4 Maximize the Appearance section 5 At Logo select an existing image file OR Upload a new image file l Appearance Logo Folder
209. kin DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width Preview Host Site f Edit Container kw DNN Blue Image Header White Backan Preview Upload Skin LI Upload Container etting the Host Skin Setting the Edit Skin How to set the default skin applied to all edit pages of all portals within this DNN installation This setting can be overridden by Administrators via their Admin Site Settings page 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Gotothe Basic Settings Appearance section 3 OPTIONAL To upload a new skin Uploading Installing a Host Skin Uploading Installing a Host Con tainer 4 At Edit Skin complete the following a Select one of the following container directories e Select Host to displays all skins uploaded to Host gt Skins e Select Site to displays all skins stored on the Admin gt Extensions page of the current portal b Select a skin from the drop down box 5 OPTIONAL Click the 6 Preview link to preview the skin This displays the current portal in a new browser with the selected skin applied 6 Click the amp Update link E Appearance Show Copyright Credits s 7 f Use Custom Error Messages Host Site DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width N Preview Host Skin Host Site DNN Blue Image Header White Backgn preview TA Host Container TA Edit Skin l l Ci DNN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed Width w Preview Host Sit
210. ks 04 00 01 7 Map 01 00 09 MarketShare 01 00 00 Media 03 02 03 CT NewsFeeds 04 00 01 M Reports 05 01 00 Repository 03 01 15 E Store 02 01 00 E Survey 04 60 00 UsersOnline 05 01 00 wiki 04 02 00 7 XML 04 03 04 Step Seven Install Skins and Containers 1 OPTIONAL Check jm the check box beside each skin or container you want to install Creating a Custom Installation Setup for details on enabling optional skins and containers 2 Click the Next ep na button E DOTNETNUKE COMMUNITY b Install Skins and Containers DotNetNuke has a rich skinning capability On this page you can choose the Skins and Containers to install Installing a Skin and or container does not automatically enable it but it makes the skin available to you Skins v DNN BlueSkin 01 00 00 Containers Flo NN BlueContainer 01 00 00 Step Eight Install Language Packs 1 OPTIONAL Check jm the check box beside each Language you want to install Creating a Custom Instal lation Setup for details on how to enable optional languages 2 Click the Next 4 button ax DotNetNuke uh COMMUNITY 4 Install Language Packs DotNetNuke is fully localizable On this page you can choose the languages you wish to install Languages There are no languages to install Step Nine Install Authentication Systems On this page a number authentication systems are automatically selected
211. l existing modules within the selected pane Skip to Step 9 e Above Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added above e Below Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added below e Bottom This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane This is the default option 8 Click the Add Module button on the RibbonBar OR Click the m Add Module To Page link on the Iconbar For modules that enable you to add content Adding Module Content Tip When you add the module listed as Users amp Roles three separate modules Security Roles My Profile and User Accounts are added to the page These modules do not need to be used on the same page You can delete one or all of them or move them to different pages as you like Add Module Module HTML Pro ane ContentPane Title About Us Insert Above Visibility Same As Page Module Links Y Add Module Insert Module C 9 Add New Module Y Add Existing Module Module HTML Pro Pane ContentPane Title About Us Insert Above Visibility Same As Page Module Links a Add Module To Page Adding an Existing Module RibbonBar How to add an existing module to the current page using the RibbonBar The module content is shared so if you update the content on one
212. la DOTPRETHLNIN E Portal Root St stat File logo gif Upload File 6 Click the qp Update link S DOTNETNUKE You are here Home e Site Logo Payment Settings Setting the Payment Processor How to configure payment processing for this site This enables you to receive payment from users who subscribe to Member Services roles on this site PayPal is the only payment processor included by default however your DNN developer can configure DNN to work with other providers This tutorial uses PayPal as the example Tip Enabling the sandbox allows test orders to be sent to the payment gateway without taking live trans actions Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site 1 from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled Maximize the Advanced Settings section Maximize the Payment Settings section At Currency select the currency to process payments with 8E At Payment Processor select a payment processing company from the drop down list E g PayPal Click Go To Payment Processor WebSite and sign up for an account Px 8 In the Processor Userld text box enter the UserID code provided by PayPal 9 In the Processor Password text box enter the Password provided by PayPal 10 OPTIONAL In the PayPal Return URL text box enter the page URL that subscribers are redirected t
213. lass select a class for the document link 7 Click the Insert button Tip Additional document properties are available See Setting Document Properties 3 E Portal Root Filename rn e EcoZany docx E Exports E Gallery F Images Link Text EcoZany docx E Mecha Target Mone BE Templates Tooltip Download Eco any Profile CSS Class Apply Class bi b Setting Document Properties How to set edit the optional properties of documents inserted using the RADEditor 1 2 3 4 Insert the documenit Right click on the document and click the Properties button This opens the Hyperlink Manager Edit the link as required Click the OK button Inserting Flash How to insert Flash media using the RADEditor 1 Click the Flash Manager button This opens the Flash Manager 2 Navigate to and select the required Flash See Using the Resource Manager 3 OPTIONAL Click the Properties tab and set the properties a At Specify Class ID select from these options e Check jm the check box to set a class for this media This reveals the Class ID text box i In the Class ID text box enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash ii Uncheck p the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set e Uncheck ni the check box to use the default class In the Width text box enter a pixel value to set the Flash width Leave thi
214. le The Search Admin module enables authorized users to specify the settings associated with DNN s search capabil ity which will be applied to this site Optional Settings e Maximum and minimum word length when searching e Whether to include common words and numbers e Ability to re index the search catalog the content which is searched if there has been significant changes since the last indexing Search Admin TA Maximum Word Length t Minimum Word Length t Include Common Words t Include Numbers GP Update E Re Index Content Re Indexing Searched Content How to re index the search content for maximum efficiency and to ensure all new content is included in searches made on this site using the Search Admin module 1 Click the w Re Index Content link to re index the search content for maximum efficiency Host Tip The Host can use the Scheduler module Host Schedule to configure the site to automatically re index searchable content on a regular basis The default configuration re indexes content every 30 minutes Search Admin Maximum Word Length Minimum Word Length Include Common Words Include Numbers P Update P Re Index Content Includins Common Words in Searches How to set searches made on this site to include common words such as the using the Search Admin module 1 At Include Common Words check the check box to search for common words 2 Click the amp Update
215. le username which has been granted permission 9 In the Copy column select from these options e g Permission Granted Users with Copy permission can make a copy any page they can view The new page can only be a child of the page they have copy permissions for e j Permission Denied Permission to copy the page is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to copy the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 10 In the Delete column select from these options e Permission Granted Users with Delete permissions can delete the page If the page has child pages they are also deleted when the parent is deleted however the user does not automatically have Delete permissions for these child pages e j Permission Denied Permission to delete the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to delete the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 11 In the Export column select from these options V Permission Granted Users with Export permissions can export a page e j Permission Denied Permission to export the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to export the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permissio
216. less Full Control Edit permission is granted 13 In the Manage Settings column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Manage Settings permissions can change the page settings Users can edit all of the settings on the Settings page except for the permissions section which will not be visible e j Permission Denied Permission to manage settings the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to manage settings for the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 14 In the Navigate column select from these options e Permission Granted Users with Navigate permissions can view a page in the navigation menu Users can have this permission without view permissions in which case they will not be able to view any content on the page but the page will be visible in the menu e j Permission Denied Permission to navigate to the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to navigate to the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 15 In the Full Control or Edit Page column select from these options e j Permission Granted Users with Full Control permissions have full administrative rights for the page This permission is the same as the Edit Page permission in the Community Edition This
217. link Search Admin Maximum Word Length 20 Minimum Word Length 3 Include Common Words Include Numbers mM Update p Re Index Content nciuaing common words 1n site searches Including Numbers in Searches How to set searches made on this site to include numbers using the Site Admin module 1 At Include Numbers check the check box to include numbers in searches 2 Click the M Update link Search Admin Maximum Word Length Minimum Word Length Include Common Words Include Numbers ncluding numbers 1n searches Setting the Maximum Word Length for Searches How to set the default maximum word length for searches on this site using the Search Admin module 1 In the Maximum Word Length text box enter the maximum length word to search for as a numeric value E g 20 2 Click the qp Update link Search Admin Maximum Word Length Minimum Word Length Include Common Words Include Numbers T Update E Re Index Content Setting Minimum Word Length for Searches How to set the default minimum word length for searches on this site using the Search Admin module 1 In the Minimum Word Length text box enter the minimum length word to search for as a numeric value E g 3 2 Click the amp Update link Search Admin Maximum Word Length Minimum Word Length amp Include Common Words Include Numbers
218. link Feed Explorer Wahoo My Yahoo Mail More T Make Y your home page OO News Search Business World Entertainment Sports Tech Politics Front Page Top Stories Wiorkd Neng HIGHLIGHT Parade for respect A Ro rainbow colours during a and ask for the respect of 7 05 PM ET Slideshow EJ My vr add Na yahoo Googie and bb News are a preset Content source option Displaying Custom OPML using a Custom URL or File How to set the Feed Explorer to display any custom data by entering a URL to an OPML Outline Processor Markup Language file or by uploading an OPML File An OPML file is an XML file which contains markup describing multiple RSS feeds 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Go to the Feed Explorer Settings section 3 At Content Source select Custom OPML URL File 4 In the Custom OPML URL File text box enter an absolute URL or file path E g http ww w domain com portals o myopmlfile xml 5 Click the Update link Displaying Custom OPML using Custom Text How to display any custom RSS feed data by entering OPML Outline Processor Markup Language that is cus tomized for the Feed Explorer module 1 2 5 Select sf Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the Feed Explorer Settings section At Content Source select the Custom OPML Text radio button Edit the existing text in the Custom OPML Text t
219. listed in the order that they were deleted from most recently deleted to first deleted Restoring Modules and Pages e Restoring a page will restore it to its previous location on the site menu All modules including content will also be restored e A module including content is restored to a selected page Deleting Modules and Pages e Deletion is permanent e Page deletion includes modules and content e Module deletion includes content Tip It is recommended that unwanted pages and module are regularly deleted from the recycle bin This will ensures that the Recycle Bin doesn t become so large that Site Administrators must search through a large number of modules and pages to find the required item Recycle Bin lH Pages Our Philosophy Toy Catalogue O Modules Fair Trade Fair Labour About Fair Trade Fair Trade Fair Labour About Fair Labour Empty Recycle Bin Restoring Deleted Modules How to restore one or more deleted modules including module content to their original page using the Recycle Bin module 1 In the Modules window click on the name of each module to be restored 2 Click the Restore i button Recycle Bin E Pages Our Products Our Philosophy Toy Catalogue Fair Trade Fair Labour D Modules Fair Trade Fair Labour About Fair Trade Fair Trade Fair Labour About Fair Labour Empty Recycle Bin Restoring Deleted Pages How to restore one or more deleted pages to the s
220. llow text to wrap Cell Properties lity Cell Properties Height Width Content Alignment Background ae Style Builder fy CSS Class SubHead Back Image EMEN Id na text wrapping Select All ana 5 Click the OK button to save or go to another tab of the Table Wizard to set more properties Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Setting Table Accessibility How to set the accessibility of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the RADEditor 1 Open the Table Wizard See Inserting a Table OR Right click on an existing table and select Table Properties 2 Goto the Accessibility tab and set any of these Accessibility Options a In the Heading Rows text box enter the number of rows which are headings A maximum of five 5 is allowed In the Heading Columns text box enter the number of columns which are headings A maximum of five 4 is allowed In the Caption text box enter a caption for the table The caption displays above the table At Caption Alignment click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the align ment of the caption In the Summary text box enter a summary of the table contents The table summary isn t displayed on the page but can be read using accessibility tools such as text readers At Associate Cells With Headers check m the check box to associate cells with headers OR uncheck E the check box to disable
221. llowing options is available depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane e Top Select to add the module above all existing modules within the selected pane Skip to Step 9 e Above Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added above e Below Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane a At Module select the module the new module will be added below e Bottom This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane This is the default option 8 At Copy Module select from these options e Check jm the check box to create an independent instance of this module This new module contains both the settings and where applicable the content of the existing module however you can modify this module without affecting the existing module e Uncheck r4 the check box to display the existing module on this page This module shares the set tings and where applicable the content of the existing module and modifying either instance will update both versions 9 Click the Add Module button Related Topics e Adding Module Content ane ContentPane Module About Us Insert Above Visibility Same As Page Add Module Insert Module Adding an HXxISUng Viodule using e Kibbonbar Adding an Existing Module Iconbar How to add an existing module to the current page
222. load a Image a Click the Upload File link b Click the Browse button and select the file from your computer Photo Folder My Folder File C Images RoseBooth Cancel c Click the amp Save File link to save the selected file This displays the selected photo Photo File a RoseBooth gif Upload File d Click the 45 Update link e To Select a Previously Uploaded Image a At File select the required photo from the drop down list b Click the 45 Update link e Remove all Images a At File select lt None Specified gt b Click the M Update link t Photo Folder My Folder 7 Upload File Managing your User Credentials How to manage your user credentials including your names and email address Note Your user name cannot be changed Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required y button 1 Login to the site Logging into a Site 2 Click on your Display Name link typically located in the top right corner of the site OR Navigate to a My Profile module This displays the My Profile page 3 Click the Edit Profile link This displays the Manage Profile page 4 Update any of these User Credentials a In the First Name text box edit your first name b In the Last Name text box edit your last name c In the Display Name text box edit the name you want to be displayed to other site members d In the Email Address text box edit your email addr
223. low 4 Click the amp Register link Tip Depending on the set up of the site you may be automatically logged in and your account details dis played or you may need to open your welcome email to obtain additional information to complete login gt User Registration User Registration Note Membership to this portal is Public Once your account information has been submitted you will be immediately granted access to the portal environment All fields marked with a red arrow are required Note Registration my take several seconds Once you olor te Register button please wait und the system responds User Name JoSmith First Name Joanne Last Name Smith Display Name Hot Shot Email Address jo domain com Enter a password Password LIII o TA Confirm Password a security Code Enter the code shown above in the box below QFAkn4 1gning up as a Registered User with a Security Code Logging In and Out Logging into a Site How to login to a site using the typical basic login method 1 Click the Login link to display the Account Login module also titled the User Log In module This link is typically located in the top right corner of each page OR Navigate to an Account Login module Register Login 2 In the User Name text box enter your user name 3 In the Password text box enter your password 4 Click the Login Login button Tip Mouse over or click
224. lt tr gt lt thody gt lt table gt Options Max Snippet Width 96 Select Language Markup x HTML AML ASP Preview Max Snippet Height TE Display Line Numbers Preview lt table style width S5 px thead thead lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt How to handcode a table in HTML lt td gt lt tr gt lt thody gt lt table gt 10 Click the OK button to insert the code block Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor table style width S50 0px lt thead gt lt thead gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt How to handcode a table in HIML lt td gt lt tr gt Design 4 HTML Words 17 Characters 164 Publish Modifying Editor Size How to increase or decrease the size of the RADEditor 1 Position your mouse over the bottom right corner of the Editor until it becomes a two directional arrow 2 Click and drag the Editor larger or smaller as desired Release when the desired size is displayed Edit Content Editor O Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor COMPANY INFORMATION EcoZany is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZ any products are handmade All handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade FAIR TRADE EcoZany has developed a pricing structure for our products which ensures producers in developing countries are not disadvantaged 7 Design lt gt HTML Words 51 Ch
225. luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia gt Print Edit Text Exporting Module Content How to export module content Exported content can then be imported it into another module of the same type E g You can only import content from a Links module into another Links module Examples of modules which permit importing exporting include the Announcements Documents FAQs Help Links Media Repository Sur vey HTML User Defined Table and XML modules 1 Select 44 Export Content from the module menu This opens the Export Module inke amp Add Link E gt Import Content lt 3 Export Content x4 Help 34 Online Help Eal Settings Delete love 2 At Folder select the folder where you want to save the exported content 3 In the File text box enter a name for the export file Note The module type is entered by default It is use ful to keep this as the start of the file name so you can easily identify the module type in the future E g Links Sponsors December2011 4 Click the Export link This creates an XML file which is saved to the selected folder Export Module Folder Root File Links Sponsors_May2009 Exoor Cance Viewing Module Help How to read an overview of the module s purpose as well as basic help on using a module Technical information is also displayed to Host users 1 Select i Help from the mo
226. ly deleted from a module how ever this is not applicable to all modules For full details on deleting content for individual module types see the Managing Individual Modules section Tip If the Control Panel ensure EDIT mode ts selected 1 Click the Edit P button located beside the content to be deleted 2 Click the Delete link This displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item 3 Click the OK button to confirm deletion Tip To delete content from modules with a single content item such as the HTML and IFrame modules you can either remove all the content or simply delete the module v Links oe P DotNetNuke Website d Project Downloads PF Resource Directory Aon a User Group P Link Exchange Add Link Deleting a Module How to delete a module from a page Tip Deleted modules are stored in the Recycle Bin 1 Select Delete from the module menu A dialog box asking Are You Sure You Want To Delete This Module is displayed 2 Click the OK button to confirm inke m 4 Add Link E Import Content Export Content x4 Help Online Help Settings Delete Related Topics e See Delete Modules from Secondary Language Managing Modules About the Module Menu An overview of the tools available from the module menu also known as the module action menu This menu ena bles users with the correct permissions to add and edit module content
227. mod nec e Quisque ultrices lacus eu enim accumsan quis dapibus justo dapibus Design 4 HTML Words 88 Charaderz 507 3 OPTIONAL Click the 6 Preview link This displays the content with token replacement enabled in the Preview Content section below 4 OPTIONAL At Publish check py the check box to publish OR Uncheck j the check box if the con tent is not yet ready for publishing Note This field displays if Content Staging is enabled Setting a Work flow 5 Click the amp Save link Text HTML Dear John Citizen Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aenean dolor erat fringilla vehicula porta non mattis ut neque Nullam rhoncus lectus et vehicula aliquam nisl metus volutpat nunc ut consequat libero turpis in urna Vestibulum porta dui non sapien sollicitudin bibendum Morbi varius lacus magna Etiam blandit rhoncus posuere Vivamus at nisi eu lectus malesuada lobortis Donec commodo neque sed enim vulputate sed ornare felis imperdiet Quisque venenatis tincidunt tellus in mattis libero euismod nec Quisque ultrices lacus eu enim accumsan quis dapibus justo dapibus HTML Replacement Tokens The list of replacement tokens for the HTML module Token Portal Currency Portal Description Portal Email Portal FooterText Portal HomeDirectory Portal LogoFile Portal PortalName Portal TimeZoneOffset User Tokens User DisplayName User Email
228. mp 9 Publish ap Save Cancel A Preview Adding rich text to the HIML module Pasting HTML How to paste HTML into the HTML module 1 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link 2 Select the Basic Text Box radio button above the Editor This displays the Editor as a Basic Text Box Content is displayed as HTML 3 At Render Mode which is displayed at the base of the Editor select Html 4 Paste in your Html 5 OPTIONAL Click the e Preview link 6 OPTIONAL At Publish check jm the check box to publish OR Uncheck r4 the check box if the con tent is not yet ready for publishing Note This field only displays when Content Staging is enabled Set ting a Workflow 7 Click the 4g Save link Tip HTML can also be pasted into the Raw Render Mode Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box O Rich Text Editar lt p gt Dear User FirstName User LastName lt p gt lt p gt lt img hspace 5 alt vspace 5 align2 right width 150 height 59 src Portals 0 marketplace gif gt Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Nunc feugiat arcu eget lectus volutpat facilisis Vestibulum eleifend Magna quis fermentum fermentum orci justo viverra ligula id tristique est neque sed dolor Sed sed orci tortor Integer ultrices auctor mauris ac ornare Nam pellentesque suscipit erat in rhoncusee lt p gt lt ul gt lt li gt Aliquam a nulla et mi fringilla euism
229. n 12 In the Import column select from these options e g Permission Granted Users with Import permissions can import a page e j Permission Denied Permission to import the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Users cannot import the page unless Full Control Edit permission is granted 13 In the Manage Settings column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Manage Settings permissions can change the page settings Users can edit all of the settings on the Settings page except for the permissions section which will not be visible e j Permission Denied Permission to manage settings the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to manage settings for the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 14 In the Navigate column select from these options e Permission Granted Users with Navigate permissions can view a page in the navigation menu Users can have this permission without view permissions in which case they will not be able to view any content on the page but the page will be visible in the menu e j Permission Denied Permission to navigate to the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to navigate to the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permis
230. n 4 DOTNETNUKE COMMUNITY Configure Host Account In this page you should provide the information for the Host or SuperUser User Account This user has access to all portals created on the site and care should be taken to provide a UserName Password combination that is difficult to hack by malicious users First Name superUser Last Name Account User Name host Password Confirm Password Email Address host ecozany com SMTP Server Settings You can configure and test your SMTP Server settings Server 127 01 0 5 Authentication Anonymous Basic Enable SSL E Step Six Install Optional Modules 1 OPTIONAL Check jm the check box beside each of the modules to be installed Note You can install these or other modules at any time once installation is completed 2 Click the Next 4 button nx DOTNETNUKE Jak COMMUNITY i gt Install Optional Modules DotNetNuke has a powerful extensibility This extensibility is provided through the concept of installable modules On this page you can choose the optional Modules to install Installing the Modules makes them available to Portal Administrators Modules E Adsense 01 00 01 E Announcements 04 00 03 Cl Blog 03 05 01 E Documents 04 01 00 Events 05 00 03 E FAQs 04 04 00 E Feedback 04 04 03 Ml gormAndList 05 01 01 Forum 04 05 03 C Gallery 04 03 00 F Help 03 00 02 Comm C Frame 04 03 00 7 Lin
231. n in the Console module b At Large Icon select an image to be displayed as the Large Icon for the Console module c At Page Skin select Host or Site to view the associated skins and then select a skin from the drop down list If Use Portal Default is selected the default Portal Skin is used d At Page Container select Host or Site to view the associated containers and then select a con tainer from the drop down list If lt Use Portal Default gt is selected the default Portal Container is used e At Disabled select from these options e Check jm the check box if the page name is not a link I e When you click on the page name in the menu nothing happens Typically this option is selected for Parent pages and provides a way for users to navigate to a Child page e Unchecked r4 the check box for this page name to be a link to the page This is the default option f At Refresh Internal seconds enter the interval to wait between automatic page refreshes E g Enter 60 for 1 minute or 60 seconds Leave field blank to disable g At Page Header Tags enter any tags i e meta tags that should be rendered in the HEAD tag of the HTML for this page 3 In the Other Settings the following OPTIONAL settings are available a At Secure check jm the check box to force this page to use a secure connection or secure socket layer SSL This option requires the Administrator to configure the SSL Settings on the Admin Si
232. n the Cell Padding text box enter the pixel height of the row The default value is 4 In the Row Height text box enter the height for each banner cell E g 100 In the Row Width text box enter the width for each banner cell in pixels E g 100 Pu SL de Click the Update link i Edit Banner Banner Source ai CUm Banner Type Button Banner Group Premium Banner Count 5 a Tanen a tet Vertical Horizontal Border Width g Border Color CornflowerBlue Cell Padding 4 Row Height 100 Row Width 250 Banner Click http www dotnetnuke com through URL Update Cancel Banners NG DotNetNuke Done Right No Credit Card Re New plans starting at just 69 00 r5 Senocus Wab Hasling far Powered by Virtuozzo MANIMUMASSP Serious Microso Developers 2 easyCGl at DotNetNuke i py Windows 2003 ASP NET 2 0 emper Advanced Hosting Easy Solutions an Hosting Environment CLICK HERE Image shows default spacing setting Banners New plans starting at just 69 00 Serious Wab Masting for Exceptional Power Panel Full Admin Level Access MANIMUMASP Serious Misco Developwt AP easy CGI DolNeluke 7 m Mpu Windows 2003 ASP NET 2 0 bcp M MAG Hosting Environment PP TRATAT DotNetNuke Done Right Banners set with Cell Padding 4 Row Height 100 Setting the Banner Border How to set the width and color of the border around each banner that is d
233. n the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the cor rect permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot manage module settings unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions e Permission Granted Users can manage module settings e j Permission Denied Users cannot manage module settings unless Full Control is granted 14 In the Full Control or Edit Module column click on the check box beside a role username repeat edly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified e Permission Granted Users have full control to view the module manage module content and manage module settings Note In DNN Community Edition View Module permissions must also be granted e O Permission Denied Users are denied full control 15 Click the Update link Tip When setting Permissions you can change the selection at Filter By Group and set permissions for any of the related roles before updating For Example In the below screen capture permission to view the module are inherited from the page and per mission to edit the module has been granted to all Registered Users apart from the user with the username John t Permissions View Module Edit Module Administrators All Users Registered
234. n this section you can set up the basic settings for this page FH Page Details Page Name Store Page Title Buy EcofriendlyToys Description Buy our Ecofriendly toys online todya All toys and games are environmentally friendly and manufactured using fiar labor and adhering to fiar trade practises Keywords toys ecofriendly organic toys fair trade toys fair labor toys es Tags Blocks Dolls Products Wooden Toys Parent Page None Specified E Befo ee Nas Insert Page Before After Add to End Home KA Template Folder Templates e Page Template Deft SSS Include In Menu Permissions Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators 3 r tia a 9 A CA CA 3 ia AllUsers o o O o o O Registered Users O O g O O O Subscribers O O O O O O O Unauthenticated aga O O Username I Add Copy Page FH Localization Culture Type Create Single Neutral Culture Page Create in Current Culture only Create Localized Versions of Page Advanced Settings ap Update Cancel Adding a New Fage Related Topics e See Adding a Page to Secondary Language Adding a New Page from a Template How to add a new page based on an existing page template This option allows you to configure page settings before the new page is displ
235. na Torch Draft 7 3 2009 11 00 23 AM Marlena Torch Published 7 3 2009 10 17 57 AM Marlena Torch Published 7 5 7 3 2009 10 42 59 AM Marlena Torch Published 5 4 7 3 2009 10 00 25 AM Administrator Account Published Module Settings Adding a Workflow State How to add a new state to a workflow for a HTML module Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the HTML Module Settings section Click the Manage Workflows link This opens the Manage Workflows page You can now do any of the fol lowing Go to the Workflow section At Workflow select the required workflow from the workflow drop down box Go to the States section 10 11 12 13 Click the Add New State link Go to the State Configuration section In the State text box enter a name for the workflow At Reviewers to add reviewers for the state select them using the permissions grid At Notify check jj the check box to set the reviewers specified at Permissions to receive an email noti fication once a version reaches this state For the published state the author of the version will receive an email notification once it is published At Active check pa the check box to enable this new state OR Uncheck the check box to disable Click the Save link Adding a Workflow How to add a workflow to the HTML module Only available in DotNetNuke Pro
236. nabled or disabled in the root configuration file for your portal El Basic Settings Enter basic settings for your Hosting Account El Configuration DotNetNuke Product DotNetNuke Version Check For Upgrades Upgrade Available Data Provider NET Framework ASP NET Identity Server Name IP Address t Permissions Relative Path Physical Path Server Time GUID Is Web Farm Configuring Host Details Setting the Host Portal DotNetNuke Professional Edition 05 02 01 55 5glDataProvider 3 5 o Update 5ite to current Framework NT AUTHORITYXNETWORK SERVICE Lorraine PC fe80 c52 3401 8369 b1139013 ReflectionPermission WebPermission AspNetHostingPermission C DotNetNuke Releases DotNetNuke521PE 2 9 2010 5 21 44 AM 146FEFDA 2C67 AEBD A012 0587FB33D892 By default DNN loads the first portal created as the default Changing the portal selected here changes which por tal is loaded by default The Host portal is also the portal associated with the Host skin object 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Goto the Basic Settings section 3 Goto the Host Details section 4 At Host Portal select the host portal from the drop down list 5 Click the M Update link g Host Details Host Portal My Website t Host Title DotNetNuke Host URL http www dotnetnuke com Host Email philip beadle philipbeadle net etung e Host
237. nal permission types are available on some modules such as the Events module Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Fine grain management of modules is available In Professional Edition by providing these additional settings Delete Import Export Manage Settings and Full Control 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the Module Settings Basic Settings section Go to the Permissions field and select from the following options OPTIONAL In the Username text box enter the username of a user to whom you wish to grant or deny module permissions and then click the aj Add link Repeat for additional usernames OPTIONAL At Filter By Group select from the following options e All Roles gt Select to view all roles both global and group roles in one single list e Global Roles gt Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group This includes Administrators All Users Registered Users and Unauthenticated Users e Role Name Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group OPTIONAL At Inherit View permissions from Page select from these options e Check 17 the check box if the users authorized to view this module are the same as the page it is located on This displays the 3 Security Roles image in the View or View Module column indicating that the view security is locked Skip to step 7 e Uncheck r4 the ch
238. nd uses the legacy Auto Install procedure Choose Language English e DNN Installation Wizara Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard How to use the Auto installation method which bypasses the Wizard and uses the legacy Auto Install procedure Step One DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Complete the following settings 1 At Select Installation Method select Auto 2 At Choose Language select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard The following languages are available English Italian French German Spanish Catalan Dutch Polish Turkish Japanese Russian and Arabic 3 Click the Next s nja button KY DOTNEeTNUKE ds COMMUNITY DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Version 05 05 00 Welcome to the DotNetNuke Installation Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of your DotNetNuke Application You may navigate through the Wizard using the Next and Previous buttons On some pages you will see a third button Test This button will allow you to test the configuration before you continue to see the effects of changes The first step is to select the installation method to use and to choose the language you would like to use for the Installation Custom The Custom installation method provides you with the ability to completely customise your DotNetNuke installation Select this option if you wish to control which optional components g
239. ng a new page See Inserting a Page RibbonBar or Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page 1 2 Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section In the Page Name text box enter a name for the page If this page is displayed in the menu this will be the name in the menu In the Page Title text box enter a short descriptive sentence summarizing the page content The title is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page It is recommended that the title contains at least 5 highly descriptive words and does not exceed 200 characters In the Description text box enter a description of the page content The description is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page It is recommended that the description contains at least 5 words and does not exceed 1000 characters In the Keywords text box enter key words for this page separated by comma At Tags select one or more tags associated with this page Page tagging is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results At Parent Page select None Specified to set this page as a parent page OR Select the parent page from the drop down box Note Page Editors can only select parent pages which they are editors of 8 At Insert Page select from these options to choose the location of the new page in the menu e Select a page from the drop down box and then select to add the new page either Before or After
240. ng the SMTP Server and Port How to set the SMTP Server address and an alternate port for new portals SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the mail server which sends outgoing mail 1 2 6 Navigate to Host Host Settings Go to the Advanced Settings section Maximize the SMTP Server Settings section In the SMTP Server and port text box enter one of the following options e Enter the SMTP address E g mail dotnetnuke com e Specify an alternate port by adding a colon and the port number E g smtp dotnetnuke com 587 e Enter the SMTP server name only to use default port number E g 25 At SMTP Authentication select from the following options e Anonymous This is the default option e Basic a In the SMTP Username text box enter a SMTP Username if required b In the SMTP Password text box enter a SMTP Password if required e NTLM Click the Update link FH SMTP Server Settings KA SMTP Server and port smtp dotnetnuke com 587 cf SMTP Authentication C Anonymous Basic f SMTP Enable SSL f SMTP Username MyUsername KA SMTP Password 55242582555 Testing Outgoing Email Settings How to test the outgoing mail settings for all portals 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Goto the Advanced Settings section 3 Maximize the SMTP Server Settings section 4 Click the Test link to send a test email to the Host account One of the following results is displayed e Ifthe test is successful the Email
241. ngs for your site El Security Settings User Registration None Private Public Verified O Page Management Splash Page None Specified gt Home Page Login Page zNone Specified Registration Page lt None Specified gt User Profile Page User Profile Home Directory Portals 0 Payment Settings Usability Settings Other Settings Stylesheet Editor Update Created By System On 4 27 2010 2 41 13 PM The Site Settings Page Site Details Setting the Site Title How to set the site title which is displayed in the title bar of the web site browser Tip This title is also used as a tool tip when a user places their mouse over the site logo See Setting the Site Logo Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site 1 i from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Go to the Basic Settings Site Details section 4 In the Title text box enter a title for the site a Site Details Title Mv Website 5 Click the amp Update link E My Website Windows Internet Explorer e j fai http www dnnangel com he ite Title Setting the Site Description How to set the description used by search engines to index this site l Navigate to Admin Site Settings OR Select Site We from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select
242. nistrator Subscription grants you immediate access to any pages or content restricted to service subscribers Login to the site Logging into a Site Enter the RSVP link into the Address window or your web site browser OR click on the RSVP link in an email message E g http www domain com Default aspx rsvp rsvpcode amp portalid o Logout and then Login to the site to gain access to the new services Configuring DotNetNuke Host Settings Viewing Configuration Details How to view Configuration details for your DNN installation Most of these fields cannot be editable using this page Exceptions are the Check For Upgrades and Notify Host fields 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Basic Settings section 3 Go to the Configuration section The following details are displayed DotNetNuke Product The DotNetNuke product you are running E g DotNetNuke Professional Edition DotNetNuke Version The version of this DotNetNuke installation At Display Beta Message Check jm the check box to display a message indicating that the run ning version is a Beta release At Check For Upgrades Check jm the check box to set this DNN Installation to check the Dot NetNuke web site for new framework upgrades Upgrade Available If Check For Upgrades is checked jm an icon is displayed at this field whenever an upgrade is available Data Provider The provider name which is identified as the default data provider
243. ns from Page select from these options e Check jm the check box if the users authorized to view this module are the same as the page it is located on This displays the 4 Security Roles image in the View or View Module column indicating that the view security is locked Skip to step 7 e Uncheck r4 the check box to set different permissions for viewing this module than set for the page it is located on If you choose to uncheck this option the check boxes at View Module will become available 7 In the View or View Module column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot view the module unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control per missions Note Users with Edit Module permissions in DNN Community Edition cannot view the module 3 Permission Granted Users can view the module O Permission Denied Users cannot view the module unless Full Control is granted 8 If you are using DotNetNuke Community Edition Skip to Step 14 9 In the Edit Content column click on the check box beside a role username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed The following options are available e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot edit content unless they belong to another role username which h
244. nstall Skin folder Managing Your User Account Signing Up for a User Account Signing up as a Registered User How to sign up to become a registered user of a site Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required y button 1 Click the Register link typically located in the top right corner of the page This opens the User Reg istration page Register Login 2 In the User Registration section complete all of these fields a In the User Name text box enter a user name Your user name is private and cannot be changed b In the First Name text box enter your first name c In the Last Name text box enter your last name d In the Display Name text box enter the name you want to be displayed to other site members e In the Email Address text box enter a valid email address 3 Inthe Enter a Password section complete all of these fields a In the Password text box enter your password Note Passwords are case sensitive b In the Confirm Password text box re enter your password 4 Click the gp Register link Tip Depending on the set up of the site you may be automatically logged in and your account details dis played or you may need to open your welcome email to obtain additional information to complete login z User Registration User Registration Note Membership to this portal is Public Once your account information has been submitted you will be immediately granted access to the portal environment All fi
245. ntent staging Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition and upload staged content Adding Search Capabilities To Your Site How to add search capabilities to your site and get your site listed on search engines Working With Files And Images How to use the File Manager to upload and manage files such as images documents etc which can be viewed and or downloaded from your site Managing Site Access Using Security Roles How to use one of DNN s core functionality which is controlling which users can view which pages and modules on the site This section also show how to create services which user s can subscribe to access Managing User Accounts How to create and manage user accounts for your site members Managing Vendors Banners And Affiliates How to create and manage vendors accounts and ven dor affiliate accounts as well as create banners which can be displayed using the Banners module Sending Newsletters To Site Members How to send basic and personalized email messages to selected users and security roles Managing Site Design The basics of setting site wide page and module designs DotNetNuke Installation Wizard About the Installation Wizard DotNetNuke has an easy to use Installation Wizard which helps you configure your DNN web site There are three different installation methods provided e Custom The Custom installation method provides you with the ability to completely customize your Dot NetNuke installa
246. o after payment Leave blank to return to the Home page 11 OPTIONAL In the PayPal Cancel URL text box enter page URL that subscribers are redirected if pay ment is canceled Leave blank to return to the Home page 12 At Use Sandbox select from these options e Check jg the check box to enable PayPal Sandbox e Uncheck r4 the check box to disable Sandbox and enable live transactions 13 Click the Update link El Payment Settings Currency U 5 Dollars USD t Payment Processor PayPal Go To Payment Processor WebSite Processor Userld MyUserID Processor Password FT TTTTT t PayPal Return URL w w w ecozany com ThankYou aspx t PayPal Cancel URL WWW ecozany com Cancellation aspx Use Sandbox v Other Settings Setting the Primary Administrator How to set the primary administrator for this site This Administrator receives email notification of member activ ities such as new registrations unregistered accounts and feedback submitted using the Feedback module unless this is overridden on the Feedback module Tip To create new Administrators add a new user account See Adding a User Account and then add the user to the Administrators security role See Adding a User to a Security Role Navigate to Admin Site Settings OR Select Site wa from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages ar
247. o the Basic Settings Appearance section Click the 4 Upload Skin link This opens the Install Legacy Skin Package page of the Host File Manager Click the Browse button Navigate to and select the skin package E X we ID Click the 45 Install Legacy Skin Package link 7 Click the a Return link to return to the Host Settings page Y e Install Legacy Skin Package d DotNetNuke Skins MySkin zip Browse JC s Return nstalling a Host Skin Setting the Host Skin How to set the skin used on host pages of this DNN installation 1 Navigate to Host gt Host Settings 2 Go to the Basic Settings Appearance section 3 OPTIONAL To upload a new skin Uploading Installing a Host Skin 4 At Host Skin complete the following a Select one of the following skins directories e Select Host to displays all skins uploaded to Host gt Skins e Select Site to displays all skins stored on the Admin gt Extensions page of the current portal b Select a skin from the drop down box 5 OPTIONAL Click the amp Preview link to preview the skin This displays the current portal in a new browser with the selected skin applied 6 Click the Update link E Appearance TA Show Copyright Credits f Use Custom Error Messages TA Host Skin DIIN Blue Horizontal Menu Fixed width fe y Preview Host Site Host Container i Q DNN Blue Image Header White Backgn Preview Host Site Edit S
248. od in ac libero lt liz li vestibulum porttitor egestas justo sed pretium enim sodales varius lt li gt lt liz gt Fusce ut ipsum a lectus commodo suscipit c li li Donec aliquet nibh non ipsum mattis at hendrerit justo dignissim lt li gt li2 Donec ut augue in tortor mattis ullamcorper et non nulla Sed iaculis elit eget erat fermentum in bibendum diam rhoncu li lt ul gt Render Mode B Text Htm Raw amp 9 Publish F GP Save a Cancel A Preview Version History Item History Preview Content Pasang HIN Adding Replacement Tokens How to add replacement tokens into the HTML module Enabling Disabling Token Replacement 1 Select Edit Content from the HTML module menu OR Click the Edit Content link 2 Enter the replacement token into the Rich Text Editor E g User FirstName User LastName Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aenean dolor erat fringilla vehicula porta non mattis ut neque Nullam rhoncus lectus et vehicula aliquam nisl metus volutpat nunc ut consequat libero turpis in urna Vestibulum porta dui non sapien sollicitudin bibendum Morbi varius lacus magna Etiam blandit rhoncus posuere e Vivamus at nisi eu lectus malesuada lobortis e Donec commodo neque sed enim vulputate sed ornare felis imperdiet e IEMISEDNUKE e Quisque venenatis tincidunt tellus in mattis libero euis
249. older Page Template Include In Menu Permissions Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators ia 9 a a DJ D CA D ia ia Allusers O O O O O Registered Users O O O O O L L Subscribers O O O O O O O Unauthenticated ikes Username I Add Copy Page El Localization Culture Type Create Single Neutral Culture Page Create in Current Culture only Create Localized Versions of Page Advanced Settings Update Cancel Adding a new page from a template Related Topics e See Adding a Page to Secondary Language Inserting a User Profile Page How to add a user registration profile page to a site using the RibbonBar 1 Maximize y the Control Panel 2 Goto the Common Tasks tab Go to the Insert Page section In the Name text box enter a name for the page E g Profile At Template select UserProfile as the page template for this page B ME M At Include In Menu check jy the check box to include this page in the menu OR Uncheck j the check box to hide the page Typically you would uncheck p gt the check box so the page is only accessible when the user clicks their Display Name link to go to their profile 7 OPTIONAL At Insert select from these options e Skip this step to add the page after to the right of the page you are currently on e Select to add the page
250. on Bar 2 Goto the Folder Security Settings section The current permission settings are displayed 3 OPTIONAL At Permissions select All Roles at the Filter By Group drop down box if dis played to display all of the roles 4 To remove folder permission perform the following a In the View Folder column uncheck j the check box beside any role or user to remove their permissions b In the Write to Folder column uncheck p the check box beside any role or user to remove their permissions 6 Click the Update link Tip If View Folder permissions are removed those users cannot view these files E g If an image is displayed in the Media module only users who belong to role permitted to View Folder will be able to see the image a Folder Security Settings ilt v Grouw lt All Roles gt TA Permissions Filter By Group View Folder Write to Folder Accounts Administrators All Users Marketing Monthly Online Magazine News eter Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users View Folder Write to Folder Daisy Duckworth Username Daisy Deleting a Folder How to permanently delete empty folders from the File Manager Tip A folder cannot be deleted if it has any child folders or if it contains any files Tip To keep files within the folder to be deleted you can move them to another folder however you cannot assign a different parent to a folder 1 Navigate to and select the fol
251. on the module name in the Available Modules list 2 Click the Add All Modules py button All modules are now listed in the Selected Modules list e To remove a premium module from the portal 1 Click on the module name in the Selected Modules list 2 Click the Remove Module 4 button The module is now removed from the Selected Mod ules list e To remove all premium modules from the site 1 Click on the module name in the Selected Modules list 2 Click the Remove All Modules 4 4 button All modules are now removed from the Selected Modules list 12 Click the amp Update link FH Host Settings Expiry Date 9 Hosting Fee Disk Space Page Quota KA User Quota KA Site Log History Days Premium Modules 7 26 2009 100 20 90 Available Modules Host Settings Lists Portals Scheduler Search Admin SQL Calendar Selected Modules File Manager Site Log Newsletters Recycle Bin Installing and Allocating Modules Installing Available Extensions How to batch install one or more extensions which are available on your DNN installation Extensions include modules skins containers languages and authentication systems E g Active Directory CardSpace LiveID and OpenID Once an extension is installed can be managed and allocated to one or more portals using the Host gt Extensions page 1 2 2235 E RES N 10 11 12 13 Navigate to Host 5 Extensions
252. ontentPane wit mg i Add Settings Delete Title Insert Bottom Site Users Roles Dm S Visibility Same As Page y o amp Copy Export Import dp Add Selected Module To Page Files Help Extensions Page Functions The Page Functions section left is accessible to Page Editors Administrators and SuperUsers It enables users to add new pages See Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page edit settings for the current page See Editing Page Settings delete the current page See Deleting a Page copy the current page See Copying a Page export the current page See Exporting a Page and import a page See Importing a New Page Note Page Editors will have access to one or more of these tools according to the permissions granted to them Access will change depending on the permissions for the current page Module Insertion i9 Add New Module J Add Existing Module Module HIML Pane ContentPane Title Products Insert Bottom Visibility Same As Page Add Selected Module To Page Tip Users must be authorized to deploy a module and be a page editor to add a module to a page Common Tasks Page Editors can access this icon Help x button which links to the DNN Online Help URL set by the host This option is disabled if no help link is provided Administrators and Hosts can access these additional icons eit Site Opens the Admin gt Site Settings page See About the Site Settings Page ag Users Op
253. or Container Package 358 Uploading Installing a Host Skin 22222200000 00000 Nakaka 358 Setting the Host Skin 2200 c cece eee a a a a aaa aaa a aaa aa aaa 356 Setting the Edit Skin a 359 Setting the Portal Skin aaa a cece aa a aa a aaa a aaa aa aaa aaa 360 Setting the Edit Skin _ aa aa a aaa aa a aaa a aa a aaa aaa aaa aaa 361 Setting Module Layout amp Design 362 Uploading Installing a Host Container 222220200000 000 aaa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa 362 Setting the Host Container 363 Setting the Edit Container 364 Setting the Edit Container 365 Module Container Settings 22 22200000000000 00000000 0S a a aaa aaa a aaa a aaa aa aaa aaa 366 Setting a Mod le Fe o e RENDER a hot aan e aaa a a Aa aba aa Bapa Ig a E naa a ab a kaa gan Laa aaa ag aan A aa ae 366 Setting Container Visibility abaka a da Da ba aa a tots a ag aa DOR tious E D ga nog pt ha DU a a Bac KARI to KENANG 308 Setting Module Printing aaa a cee cece eee a a a a aaa a aa aaa a aaa aaa aaa aaa ae 369 Setting Module Syndication 2 2 0 2 ccc a ee cece ccc a a aa aa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 371 About this Manual About this DotNetNuke Manual DNN Version DNN Professional Edition 5 5 and DNN Community Edition 5 5 Purpose This manual provides instructions on how to set up create and maintain one or more web sites using DNN Audience
254. ount coupons and more Free Subscibe Newsletter Subscribe to our monthly newsletter on what s new in wholistic medicine Li q z MSIE Free and our latest classes Member Services display on the Manage Profile page Editing a Security Role How to edit the settings and details of a security role using the Security Roles module 1 If the required role is not displayed at Filter By Role Group select the Role Group Name associated with the role or select All Roles gt 2 Click the Edit button beside the role to be edited 3 Edit the settings as required 4 Click the Update link Security Roles Filter By Role Group Global Roles gt Name Description Fee Every Period Trial Every Fd Administrators Portal Administration Join this free service to receive our online magazine sa Monthly Online i g each month including monthly prize draw discount Magazine a cad coupons and more mg l Subscribe to our monthly newsletter on what s new in d sy Newsletter iuis wholistic medicine and our latest classes Fd gt Registered Users Registered Users Fd Subscribers A public role for portal subscriptions add New Role Grou Add New Role Euser Settings diting a role Deleting a Security Role How to permanently delete a security role from the Security Roles module This will also delete the information of which users were members of this role Tip The Administrators and Registered Users
255. oup vs Image Link Width Height Text Script URL CPM Cost a Impressions Start Date End Date Criteria Adaing an 1mage banner DNNangel Dummies Book MicroButton Link Type URL A Link To An External Resource File A File On Your Site File Location banners File Name Banners microbutton2 gif Upload New File Visit DNNangel com to visit the blog of the a DotNetNuke For Dummies author Link Type O URL A Link To An External Resource Page A Page On Your Site O File A File On Your Site Select A Web Page From Your Site Media O 0 9 5 2007 Calendar Calendar or AND Update Cancel a Banners E SNOWCOVERE Two image banners displayed in the Banners module Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Editing a Vendor Banner How to edit the properties of a banner using the Vendors module 1 Locate the required vendor account by selecting a filter or doing a search 2 Click the Edit g button beside the required vendor account This opens the Edit Vendors page Maximize the Banner Advertising section This displays all banners associated with this vendor Click the Edit button beside the banner to be edited Edit the required fields a ST FT KG Click the Update link a Banner Advertising Banner Type Group Impressions CPM Views Clicks Start JP DNNangel Dummies
256. page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control Edit Page permissions 6 If you are using DNN Community Edition Skip to Step 15 7 In the Add column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Add permissions for a page can add child pages to that page They cannot add any parent pages and they cannot add child pages to any other pages e j Permission Denied Permission to add child pages is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to add pages unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 8 In the Add Content column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Add Content permissions for a page can edit content on the page These users can add move and delete modules as well as manage the content and settings for modules on the page e j Permission Denied Permission to add and manage module content is denied unless Full Con trol is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to view the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 9 In the Copy column select from these options e g Permission Granted Users with Copy permission can make a copy any page they can view The new page can only be a child of the page they have copy permissions for e j P
257. ped image Click the Image Map Editor p9 button OR Right click on the image and click the Image Map Editor 9 button This opens the Image Map Editor window Add edit update and delete mapped areas as required See Creating an Image Map Click OK to save Image Map Editor Preview Choose Image Chaase Image JPortals Gallery 389 Ecc 9 Select Area Shape Rectangle O Circle Define Area Properties Left 152 Jp Top 133 px Width 173 px Height 150 px URL http www ecozany comhandmade a Target New Window Alt Text Hand painted facial features Update Area Area RemoveArea RemoveAll Remove All reating an Image Map Managing Links and Anchors Adding an Email Link How to add an email link to text or an image using the RADEditor Clicking the link opens the user s email pro gram with the selected email address in the Send To field 1 2 Highlight the text object for the link OR Place you cursor where you want to insert the link Click the Hyperlink Manager CTRL K o button This opens the Hyperlink Manager Go to the E mail tab In the Address text box enter the email address In the Link Text text box enter the email address 6 7 8 In the Subject text box enter a subject which will populate the subject field of the email message OPTIONAL At CSS Class select a class for the link OR Select Clear Class to use the d
258. pload install a legacy container package to the Host skin directory from the Host Settings page 1 Navigate to Host Host Settings 2 Go to the Basic Settings Appearance section 3 Click the 4 Upload Container link This opens the Install Legacy Container Package page of the Host File Manager 4 Click the Browse button 5 Navigate to and select the container package 6 Click the 45 Install Legacy Container Package link 7 Click the Return link to return to the Host Settings page Upload Legacy Container Package C myskins container zip Browse toad Legacy Container Packa Setting the Host Container How to set the module container which is applied to all modules on the host pages 1l 2 Navigate to Host Host Settings Go to the Basic Settings Appearance section OPTIONAL To upload a new container Uploading Installing a Host Container At Host Container complete the following a Select one of the following container directories e Select Host to displays all containers uploaded to Host gt Skins e Select Site to displays all containers stored on the Admin Extensions page of the current por tal b Select a container from the drop down box 5 OPTIONAL Click the amp Preview link to preview the container This displays the current portal in a new browser with the selected container applied 6 Click the amp Update link E Appearance f Show Copyright Credits
259. ptional components get installed e Typical The Typical installation method makes some typical choices for you Auto The Auto installation method bypasses the Wizard completely and uses the legacy Auto Install procedure Choose Language English LIT Step Two Checking File Permissions 1 Click the Test Permissions a test Permissions button to test that this DNN installation can suc cessfully create and delete folders and files If the test is successful a success message reading Your site passed the permissions check is displayed at File Permissions Summary 2 Click the Next na button LDoTherhNumie c COMMUNITY 4 Checking File Permissions DotNetNuke has extensive file upload capabilities for content modules and skins These features require custom security settings so that the application is able to create and remove files in your website This page checks the current file permissions to ensure that these features will work correctly Note The test checks the root folder of your application In most cases this is good enough as child folders usually inherit their file and folder permissions from their parent However occasionally this test will pass but there will be a more restrictive permission set on one of the descendant files folders File Permissions Summary Your site passed the permissions check a Previous E Next Step Three Configure Databas
260. r Select Basic Text Box to send a plain text email OR Select Rich Text Box to send an HTML email with formatting and images f OPTIONAL Click the Preview Email link to preview the newsletter 2 Maximize the Advanced Settings section to set any of the following optional settings 3 At Attachment select the required attachment See Setting a File Link 4 At Replace Tokens check jm the check box 5 At No Duplicate Addresses select from these options e Check jm the check box to remove duplicate addresses entered into the Additional Emails field e Uncheck r4 the check box to send duplicates entered into this field Note This does not affect the User Role s field which always removes duplicates 6 At Priority select the priority of the email High Normal Low from the drop down box Normal is the default setting 7 At Send Method select To One Message Per Email Address Personalized 8 At Send Action select from the following options e Synchronous Emails are all sent before your page refreshes This method is suitable for small mail outs of approximately 100 or less e Asynchronous This starts a separate thread user process to send emails This method is suit able for large mail outs of approximately 100 or more 18 Click the Send Email link Tip A Successful or Not Successful message is displayed after you click the Send Email link For Syn chronous send action the message doesn t display until after
261. r Accounts Mana e User Credentials B Manage Roles for this Use Manage Password gt Manage Profile Manage Roles for User Donald f Security Role f Effective Date Expiry Date Marketing x 09 5 2007 31 Calendar 31 Calendar E Add Role W Send Notification Security Role Effective Date Expiry Date Registered Users Subscribers add New User Mana e Profile Properties S cancel Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Editing a User s Security Role Access How to edit a user s access to a security role using the User Accounts module 1 Find the required user account by using a filter or by performing a search 2 Click the Manage Roles button beside the required user account The details of the security roles this user currently belongs to are listed on this page 3 At Security Role select the role this user is to be added to 4 OPTIONAL At Effective Date click the kii Calendar link and select the first date the user can access this role Where no date is selected access will be immediately granted 5 OPTIONAL At Expiry Date click the 35 Calendar link and select the last date the user can access this role Where no date is selected access will not expire 6 At Send Notification select from the following options e Check jm the check box to send a notification email to the user informing them of their new role access This is the default setting e Uncheck r4 the check box to add
262. r Description Image Name Number of CPM Cost Number of Impres sions Start Date End Date Number of Views and Number of Click Throughs 1 Click the Edit 7 button beside the required Vendor This opens the Edit Vendor page 2 Maximize the Banner Advertising section This displays all banners associated with this vendor 3 Click the Edit button beside the required banner 4 Click the Email Status to Vendor link at the base of the module A success or failure message is displayed at top of the module letting you know if the email sent successfully 5 Click the Cancel link to return to the Edit Vendor page Viewing the Clicks and Views for a Banner How to view the number of times a banner has been viewed and clicked using the Vendors module 1 Locate the required vendor account by using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit j button beside the required Vendor This opens the Edit Vendor page 3 Maximize the Banner Advertising section This displays all banners associated with this vendor including e Views The number of time a banner has been clicked on e Clicks The number of times a banner has been displayed on a page a Banner Advertising Banner Type Group Impressions CPM Views Clicks Start End DNNangel Dummies Book MicroButton DotNetNuke Text www DNNangel com Text DNNangel MicroButton Add New Banner View Affiliate Accounts Overview of Vendor Affiliates One or more affiliate a
263. r this Page lH Basic Settings Icon vs Alignment Color Border Colla pse Expand ta Display Container Link Type a Hone File A File On Your Site System Image Left Center Right Not Specified lightgray Maximized Minimized None Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice 9 Web Slice Title Web Slice Expires Web Slice TTL Module Container Cache Time secs 6 Click the amp Update link Fnter Title J Edit Text RS SI MyWebslice 7 31 2010 Calendar 10 Host Site lt Use Page Default 0 E amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere Online Help e Preview Setting Module Syndication How to enable or disable the RSS F button on the module Enabling syndication enables users to create a XML syndication of module content The Syndication icon typically displays on the bottom right corner of the module and is also displayed on the module menu Tip The Display Container setting must be checked to enable this function If it is not the RSS button can not be viewed Tip The icon image ts only displayed if the container applied to the module includes the ACTIONBUTTON skin token 1s 2 Select 7 Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Maximize the Page Settings section Go
264. ramework that cultivates a passionate developer community as well as a prosperous commercial eco system More Information http www dotnetnuke com About Overview tabid 822 Default aspx Content Overview A summary of the sections of this manual and what you will find in each section 10 11 12 13 14 About This Manual Provides a brief overview of the content of this manual and DNN DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Installing DotNetNuke using the Installation Wizard Managing Your User Account How you and all site visitors can create and manage their user account and subscribe to members services Configuring DotNetNuke Host Settings This section covers the main setting required to configure the settings of the Host portal proxy and SMTP settings for this installation as well as default settings for additional portals Creating and Managing Portals How to create additional portals within this installation and modify the default hosting settings for each Installing and Allocating Modules How to install additional modules and select which portals they are available to Building Your Portal This section covers the main settings required to set up your portal site settings and shows how to quickly build a site using the Site Wizard It details how to build a site by adding pages and modules as well as common tasks such as managing files using the File Manager Finally this section details how to configure co
265. rch engines to identify the information contained on the page It is recommended that the description contains at least 5 words and does not exceed 1000 characters In the Keywords text box enter key words for this page separated by comma At Tags select one or more tags associated with this page Page tagging is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results Note Tags can be created by users See Tagging Page Content or editors See Creating a Vocabulary At Parent Page select None Specified to set this page as a parent page OR Select the parent page from the drop down box Note Users can only select parent pages which they have been granted Add Full Control permissions for Edit permissions in Community Edition At Include In Menu check jm the check box to include this page in the menu OR Uncheck j the check box to hide the page At Permissions set the permissions to view and manage this page See Setting Page Permissions OPTIONAL At Copy Permissions to Descendants click the Copy Permissions link Copying Per missions to Descendant Pages Click the Update link Tip When setting Permissions you can change the selection at Filter By Group and set permissions for any of the related roles before updating For Example In the below screen capture permission have been set to enable All Users to view the page members of the Page Editors role to edit the page and the user with the username
266. rch Engine Sitemap OR Go to a Sitemap module 2 At Sitemap URL here you can view the URL of your Sitemap as well as the Sitemap providers which are enabled E g http ecozany com SiteM ap aspx 3 OPTIONAL Go to the Base Page URL s Settings section Here you can modify the basic settings that apply to general DotNetNuke pages a At Use page level based priorities select from these options e Check jg the check box to set the priority for each page based on the hierarchical level of the page Top level parent pages will have a value of 1 second level first level child pages 0 9 third level 0 8 second level child pages etc This setting will not change the value stored in the actual page but it will use the computed value when required e Uncheck p the check box if you don t wish to use page level based priorities Skip to step 3c b In the Minimum Priority for pages text box if Use page level based priorities is checked this field allows you set the lowest priority that will be used on low level pages You must provide a valid number between 0 0 and 1 0 c At Include Hidden Pages select from these options e Check jy the check box to include hidden pages those not visible in the menu in the Sitemap e Uncheck r4 the check box to exclude hidden pages from the Sitemap This is the default set ting d Click the Refresh Sitemap Priorities link El Base Page Urls Settings Modify the basic settings that apply to gen
267. re are two options for SQL Server 2005 2008 SQLServer 2005 and SQL Server 2008 support the use of Database Files In most situations you should choose the Database option but if you are using SQL Server 2005 2008 Express then you should use the File option Select Database SQL Server 2005 2008 Express File SOL Server 2005 2008 Database Server SQLExpress Enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located if using Oracle enter the Data Source SID Database a EcoZany Enter the Database name Integrated Security Check this if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security which means you will be using your Windows account to access SOL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will mast likely need ta check this option If you have been given a UserId Password to access your Database leave this unchecked and provide the UserId Password combination Run as db Owner Check this if you are running the database as Database Owner if left unchecked you will be running as the User ID specified Object Qualifier Enter an optional prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes 3B previous B Next Step Four Run Database Installation Scripts The installation of the database scripts will be running with the results displaying in the window below When the Installation of Database Complete message displays in the window t
268. rint friendly copy of the module content for printing Print must be enabled on the Module Setting page of a module Icon Name Function Enables the Host to view and update the source files for a module NEW source IMPORTANT Requires advanced knowledge of ASP net and DNN Settings Opens the module settings page for this module Delete Delete the module Administrators are able to restore modules from the ad Recycle Bin Refresh Refreshes the module with the latest content None Move Move the module to a new pane on the current page or to a new posi tion within the current pane Links a Add Link Export Content amp Import Content Syndicate 4 Help 4 Online Help gt Print X View Source 2 Settings Delete amp Refresh as Move Top Move Up J Move Down Move Bottom O Move To TopPane O Move To LeftPane O Move To RightPane O Move To BottomPane e Module Menu Opening the Module Menu How to open the Module Menu also known as the Module Action Menu Tip If the Control Panel is displayed ensure Mode is set to Edit 1 Mouse over the module menu This opens the drop down menu The range of actions displayed will depend upon your access to this module ext HTML Ha J Edit Text lamet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse vitae nisl Syndicate lantei ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere 34 Help P Online Help n primis in faucibus orci
269. rofile Properties cancel Deleting a user from a role Forcing a Password Change How to force a user to change their password next time they login to the site using the User Accounts module 1 Find the required user using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit gt button beside their user account 3 Click the 4 Force Password Change link This removes the Force Password Change link and checks the Update Password check box A message reading User must update password on next login is also displayed Managing a User Profile How to manage all fields of a user s profile using the User Accounts module Editable fields include address infor mation contact information biography time zone and preferred locale 1 Find the user account to be edited using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit f button beside their user account 3 Click the sy Manage Profile link 4 Edit any fields as required 5 Click the Update link 7 Edit User Accounts u Manage User Credentials I Manage Roles for this User Manage Password uw Manage Profile Edit Profile Daisy Id 25 aName Prefix First Name Middle Name Last Name Suffix gAddress Unit Street City Region Country Postal Code gContact Info Telephone Cell Mobile Fax Website E IM gPreferences us Biography Ms Daisy Esmeralda Delicous 123 Blue Gum Way Trentham Victoria
270. roles cannot be deleted 1 If the required role is not displayed at Filter By Role Group select the Role Group Name associated with the role or select lt All Roles gt 2 Click the Edit P button beside the role to be deleted 3 Click the Delete link This displays a dialog box which reads Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item 4 Click the OK button E Edit Security Roles a Basic Settings In this section vou can set up the basic settings for Windows Internet Explorer Role Name Newsletter YA Description Subscribe to o in wholistic ma Role Group 9 Public Role Auto Assignment Advanced Settings Update Cancel Manage Users in this Role Deleting a role Adding a Role Group How to add a role group to a Security Role using the Security Roles module Role Groups enable you to group mul tiple roles together making them easier to manage E g The Role Group called Staff could have the following Security Roles associated with it All Staff Telemarketing Marketing Sales Information Technology etc Roles can be filtered by Role Group which is useful on sites with lots of roles Once a role group has been added one or more security roles can be added to the role group Adding a Security Role Basic Settings and Editing a Secu rity Role 1 2 Select Ja Add New Role Group from the module menu In the Group Name text box enter a name for the Security Role Group E g Sta
271. rs Administrators Page Editors and Content Editors optional to access and perform a range of content management and administrative tasks Administrators can configure usability settings for the Control Panel See the Admin Pages gt Usability Setting sec tion Hosts can set which Control Panel used Setting the Control Panel Both types of Control Panels include the following quick links e The Admin and Host links top right provides Administrators and SuperUsers with one click access to the Admin Console page and the Host Console page respectively Related Topics e Overview of the Iconbar e See Overview of the RibbonBar Mode View Edit Layout Admin of Host Common Tasks Current Page Host Pp Mame Add Madule Module HTML Pra ane ContentPane Edit V New Title Insert Bottom Template Default Include in menu Existing EF Insert After Home Visibility Same As Page Module New adi Pana Add Module Actions Insert Page Insert Module Mode View Edit Layout admin of Host Page Functions Add New Module Add Existing Module Common Tasks p Module Select A Modules Pane ContentPane wd gt qi Settings Delete Title Insert Bottom Site Users Roles a na Visibility Same As Page E a BA a Add Selected Module To Page Files Help Extensions Overview of the RibbonBar The RibbonBar displays site management tools grouped under these three categori
272. s Here is the list of page permissions available in Community Edition e View Page View permissions enable users to view the page e Edit Page Edit permissions give users full administrative rights for the page Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt View Edit Page Administrators All Users Bloggers Chat Members EditUser Forum Admin Forum Member Global Moderator Module Editor Newsletter Page Editor Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users 0 000000000000 o0 000000010000 Username Add Copy Permissions to Copy Permissions Descendants py Editing Page Settings How to edit the settings of the current page 1 Go to the required page See Viewing Any Page 2 Maximize x the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to the Common Tasks tab and select LA Edit OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select LA Settings This opens the Page Settings page 4 Edit page settings as required See Basic Settings for Existing Pages and Advanced Settings for Existing Pages 5 Click the amp Update link 2 View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE Common Tasks Add Module New Default Include in menu Br Existing Insert After Profile Add Page Insert Page Basic Settings for New Pages How to set the basic page settings Note The Page Name field is the only mandatory field This tutorial assumes you have already begun the process of addi
273. s are han dled See the Manage Profile Properties and User Settings sections New profile properties can be created This Administration module can be deployed to any page by an authorized user It is also displayed on the Admin gt User Accounts page Tip The User Accounts module is different to the User Account module which enables Registered Users to manage their account details and membership services z ig User Accounts Search Address Telephone Created Date Authorized 8 20 2007 1 34 07 PM 9 JulieChang Julie Chang 8 20 2007 2 50 11 PM PaulaG 9 4 2007 1 35 29 PM Username admin Administrator Account paula gunther domain com Page lofi add New User A Delete Unauthorized Users iManage Profile Properties User Settings e User Accounts module Enabling Disabling User Registration How to disable or enable site visitors to apply to become a registered user of the site Enabling user registration displays the Register link on pages where the applied skin contains the Register skin object l Navigate to Admin gt Site Settings OR Select Site wi from the Control Panel 2 OPTIONAL At Select Language select which language you wish to update This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled 3 Maximize the Advanced Settings section 4 Goto the Security Settings section 5 At User Registration select from the following e None Registration is disabled e Private Registering visitors
274. s field blank to use the width defined by the Flash In the Height text box enter a pixel value to set the Flash height Leave this field blank to use the height defined by the Flash At Quality select High Medium or Low as the quality of the Flash At Play check jm the check box to auto play the Flash OR Uncheck r4 the check box if the user must select to play the Flash At Loop check jm the check box to automatically loop the Flash movie repeated OR Uncheck the check box if the user must select to replay the Flash At Flash Menu check jy the check box to display the Flash menu OR Uncheck j the check box to hide it h At Transparent check jy the check box for a transparent background OR Uncheck j the check box to disable i At HTML Align select the HTML alignment j At Flash Align select the Flash alignment k At Background Color select No Color for no background color or select a color from the drop down box 4 Click the Insert button Tip You cannot edit the properties of Flash once it has been inserted To modify Flash simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties Flash Manager ZJ ES E Upload Portal Raatiiedial Specify Class ID 5 E Portal Root ree ace Width E Documents gh Sample Movie swf E Exparts E Gallery E Images Height Quality Play Loop Flash Menu Transparent HTML Align Flash Align Background Color E E Bas
275. sign permissions 1 Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Information Bar 2 Go to the Folder Security Settings section The current permission settings are displayed 3 OPTIONAL At Permissions select lt All Roles gt from the Filter By Group drop down box if dis played to view all available roles 4 In the View Folder column check jm the check box beside each role to be granted permission to view files 5 In the Write to Folder column check jm the check box beside each role to be granted permission to manage files 6 Click the Update link a Folder Security Settings Filter By Group i All Roles gt t Permissions View Folder Write to Folder Administrators Monthly Online Magazine Hawe etter Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users Username Assigning Folder Permission to a User How to assign access to view folders and upload to folders of the File Manager module Administrators can assign folder permissions to one or more users Here s a description of the two types of permissions available e View Folder This enables users within the permitted roles to view the files within this folder If View Folder permissions are not provided users cannot view these files E g If an image is displayed in the Media module only users who belong to role permitted to View Folder will be able to see the image
276. sign to Children Pages How to copy the design applied to a page to all of its child descendant pages This applies the Page Skin and Page Container settings of the parent page to all child pages This setting is only available for existing pages with child pages Option One Using the Ribbonbar 1 Navigate to the required parent page 2 Maximize x the Control Panel 3 Goto the Current Page tab 4 Select Copy Permissions to Children This displays Confirm message box which reads Skin and con tainer will be replaced for all children of this page Are you sure you want to continue 5 Click the OK button to confirm Common Tasks Current Page Admin ng Name Page Editor Include in menu V lii Copy Permissions to Children x Import Move 7 Disabled P Help Skin Use Default Site Skin Update Page Update Current Page Copy Actions Option Two Using the Ribbonbar or Iconbar 1 Navigate to the required parent page 2 Maximize the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to either the Current Page or the Common Tasks tab and select Edit OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select p Settings 4 Gothe Advanced Settings Appearance section 5 At Copy Design to Descendants click the Copy Design link 6 Click the gt Update link Appearance Icon Link Type amp File A File On Your Site System Image File Location Root File Name None Specified Upload
277. sion 15 In the Full Control or Edit Page column select from these options e j Permission Granted Users with Full Control permissions have full administrative rights for the page This permission is the same as the Edit Page permission in the Community Edition This role overrides other settings e j Permission Denied Permission to delete the page is denied unless Full Control is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified 16 Click the T Update link Permissions Filter By Group lt All Roles gt EF Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators 7 A CJ A F All Users Bloggers Chat Members EditUser Forum Admin O wx AN amp ANG Forum Member Global Moderator Module Editor Newsletter Page Editor Registered Users Subscribers Unauthenticated Users 9 o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 006020000000 o0 o00000000000 o0 oo0000600000008 O 0o0000000000 Oooooon ocoooo od 0 0000601000000 o0 00000000000 Oooooooooood 0 o00000000000 EI E Username Copy Permissions to Descendants Copy Permissions rage Fermissions ain DNN Froressiona aiton Managing User Accounts About the User Accounts Module The User Accounts module enables the creation and management of registered user s account as well as assign ment of security roles The fields displayed on the module can be set as well as the way user account
278. sions This page runs a test to ensure this DNN installation can successfully create and delete folders and files 1 View the success fail message e If the test is successful a success message reading Your site passed the permissions check is displayed below the File Permissions Summary section e If the test is unsuccessful a message detailing possible error is displayed Fix the errors to continue 2 Click the Next ya button j DorNerNUulice b COMMUNITY Checking File Permissions DotNetNuke has extensive file upload capabilities for content modules and skins These features require custom security settings so that the application is able to create and remove files in your website This page checks the current file permissions to ensure that these features will work correctly Note The test checks the root folder of your application In most cases this is good enough as child folders usually inherit their file and folder permissions from their parent However occasionally this test will pass but there will be a more restrictive permission set on one of the descendant files folders File Permissions Summary Your site passed the permissions check a Previous E Next Step Three Configure Database Connection 1 At Select Database select one of these two options and complete the associated settings e SQL Server 2005 2008 Express File a d e At Server enter the Name or IP Address of the
279. skip this step click the z Next link To build the site from an existing template complete the following steps 1 At Build your site from a template below check jm the check box This displays a list of the avail able templates v 2 Click on the name of a template to select it This displays a description of the selected template 3 Choose one of the following options to set how duplicate modules will be handled e Ignore Places a copy of any duplicated modules on the same page e Replace Deletes the existing copy of the duplicate content and replaces it with the templated copy e Merge Combines the existing information and template information into one module 4 Click the s Next link amp Site Wizard Choose a Template for your site You can optionally choose to build your site from a preexisting template To choose a template click the checkbox to enable the list of templates and choose a template from the list If you elect to build your site using a template you need to choose how to deal with duplicate Modules Modules that are in the Template and also already on your site Build your site from a template below Default Website Template DotNetNuke Choose how to deal with duplicate Modules Modules that are in the Template and also already on your site amp Ignore Replace Merge Note If you choose Replace all existing content on pages that are also in the template will be lost Step 3
280. ssions 25 na ANNA SE ODA AAP py een RAN GA LAG E a Na eet 132 Professional Edition Permiso ODS LL a a a aaa 133 Community Edition Permissl0nNs aaa a a a aa aa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa aaa 134 Editing Page Settings ooon iets Ka pang a GA Ta ang vete KG LGA EE KUNG NGO E Ka a else Gana 135 Basic Settings for New Pages aaa kaa a aaa 222i 136 Basic Settings for Existing Pages 220 2 020 c cece ccc cc a a a eeeccecceeeeeceeeeeeceeeetceeseeteeeeeees 138 Setting Page Permissions 2 22 2000 ccccc cece c cece cece cece a a a a aa aaa aaa aa a aa aaa aaa 140 Setting Advanced Settings for New Pages aaa aaa a aaa a a aaa aa a a aaa aa a aaa aa aaa 144 Advanced Settings for Existing Pages 220 222 2000 a a aaa a a aa a a a aa a aaa aaa a aaa aaa ae 147 Localization Settings for New Pages 2 20 0 ccc cece cece ccc eccccceccecceeeceeeeeeeeeceteececeteeeeceeeteees 150 Adding and Managing Modules 150 About Modules PEPPER a a aaa a a a aaa a a aaa a a aaa aaa a aaa aa aa aaa aaa 150 Mod le BASICS NG NATAPAT AABANG BADA Ba A a aa BN ns ae A NAN gka a aane 151 No oba CHD ASICS AA 151 Andine a New M PRA 151 Adding an Existing Module RibbonBar 2 200 022 2200 ccc aaa aa aaa a aaa a aaa a aaa aaa 153 Adding an Existing Module Iconbar aaa aaa aa aaa aaa a aa a aaa a a aaa kaaa 154 Editing Module Title Inline Se Eno
281. successful Installing a Module Related Topics e See Installing Available Extensions Enabling Disabling Premium Module How to set a module as premium using the Module Definitions page Premium modules can then be assigned made available for insertion on selected portals When a module is set as premium it is selected assigned to all existing portals and can then be assigned unassigned from these portals as required Once a module is set as premium it will be a premium module on all newly created portals I e It will not be auto assigned to newly created portals 1 Navigate to Host gt Module Definitions 2 Click the Edit button beside the required module Module Definitions Name Description P Announcements This module renders a list of announcements Each announcement read more link P X Authentication Allows you to manage authentication settings for sites using Windoy d Banners Banner advertising is managed through the Vendors module in the select the number of banners to display as well as the banner type Feed Explorer Allows users to browse RES feeds using a tabbed user interface P X File Manager Administrators can manage the files stored in their upload directory to upload new files download files delete files and synchronize vo also provides information on the amount of disk space used and av P Google Adsense Allows you to create Google Adsense ads on your site 3 Go to the Extension Set
282. t Use Portal Default preview wa Copy design to descendants Disabled E Copy design Refresh Interval seconds us Page Header Tags O Other Settings wa Secure Site Map Priority 0 5 Start Date Calendar End Date Calendar Link Url Link Type None URL A Link To An External Resource 2 Page A Page On Your Site File A File On Your Site Perma nently Redirect Advanced settings for new pages Advanced Settings for Existing Pages How to set the advanced settings for existing pages on the Page Settings page See Editing Page Settings All advanced page settings are optional 1 Maximize the Advanced Settings section 2 In the Appearance section complete any of the following optional settings a At Icon select an image to be displayed beside the page name in the menu This is also used as the Small Icon in the Console module b At Large Icon select an image to be displayed as the Large Icon for the Console module c At Page Skin select Host or Site to view the associated skins and then select a skin from the drop down list If Use Portal Default is selected the default Portal Skin is used d At Page Container select Host or Site to view the associated containers and then select a con tainer from the drop down list If Use Portal Default is selected the default Portal Container is used m At Copy Design to Descendants click the Copy Des
283. tal Template X Delete Expired Partals e Portals Page Adding a Parent Portal How to add a new parent portal to this DNN installation New portals are created with the default settings as defined in the Host Settings module E g host fee host space site log history These settings can be modified once the portal is created When the portal is created the Administrator receives a message with the login details you have provided for them however their password is not included for security reasons 1 Navigate to Host Portals 2 Select J Add New Portal from the module menu OR click the l Add New Portal link This displays the Add New Portal page 3 In the Portal Setup section complete the following fields a At Portal Type select Parent b In the Portal Alias text box enter an alias for the portal E g www domain com c OPTIONAL In the Home Directory text box click the Customize link and enter a new location for this portals home directory relative to the DNN installation root directory Note Click the Cus tomize link a second time to return to default setting d OPTIONAL In the Title text box enter the name of the portal E g MyWebsite e OPTIONAL In the Description text box enter description of the portal f OPTIONAL In the Keywords text box enter the key words for the portal separated by a comma a g At Template select a template from the drop down list 4 In the Security Settings section complete t
284. tallation process DNN looks in the folders under Install to see if there are any new files that need to be processed during the installation You can modify how DNN installs by adding or removing files from these sub folders Here s how to include one of these add ins to your DNN Custom Method installation 1 2 Download DNN Installation zip file from the DotNetNuke com web site Unzip the installation file In the unzipped installation file go to the Install folder This folder contains a number of sub folders Some of these folders contain aspects of DNN that can be modified during the installation process Add one of the below zip files to the correct sub folder to make it available during installation e Authentication Systems Add authentication system zip files to the Install AuthSystem folder e Containers Add container package zip files to the Install Container folder e Languages Add language resource package zip files to the Install Languages folder e Modules Add module installation zip files to the Install Module folder In this folder you can see there are some modules with a resources extension and some with a zip extension The ones with a Zip extension are automatically installed and the ones with resources are available in a check box list for you to decide during the install process if they get installed e Providers Add provider zip files to the Install Provider folder e Skins Add skin package zip files to the I
285. te Settings page b At Site Map Priority enter the desired priority between o and 1 0 This helps determine how this page is ranked in Google with respect to other pages on your site 0 5 is the default c At Start Date click the Calendar link and select the first date the page is viewable d At End Date click the Calendar link and select the last date the page is viewable Note Expired pages can be viewed by Administrators via the Admin Pages page e OPTIONAL At Link URL to set this page to be a navigation link to another resource select or add the Link here See About the Link Control f At Permanently Redirect check pa the check box to notify the client that this page should be considered as permanently moved This would allow Search Engines to modify their URL s to directly link to the resource Note This setting is ignored if the Link Type is set to None 4 Click the T Update link Cl Advanced Settings In this Section you can set up more advanced settings for this page O Appearance Icon Link Type File A File On Your Site O System Image File Location Root File Name lt None Specified gt Upload New File La rge icon Link Type File A File On Your Site System Image File Location Root File Name None Specified Upload New File Pa ge Skin e Host Site lt Use Portal Default preview vy Page Container Host Site l
286. te from the menu OR click the Export Portal Template link At Portal select the portal to be exported as a template In the Template File Name text box enter a name to save the new template portal as E g Small Busi ness In the Template Description text box enter a description of the portal template E g Five page web site for a small business Pages are Home Products Services About Us Contact Us At Include Content select from the following options e Check jm the check box to copy portal content to the template This will copy the content of any mod ules which have export import capabilities e Uncheck r4 the check box to NOT copy the portal content Click the Export Template link The address where the exported template file s are now saved is displayed The template file has a template extension If you included the portal content a second file with a te mplate resources extension is also saved OPTIONAL Go to the saved template files and save them to your local computer for future use Tip See Host File Manager for details on how to import a portal template for use in another DNN instal lation Export Template t Portal My Website tf Template File Name Members Website f Template Description Five page website for all members includes Home Page Blog Articles Repository Portfolio Repository and Help Inlcudes sample content Include Content Export Template Editing Portal
287. te the SMTP Server Settings a In the Server text box enter your SMTP server name or IP address b At Authentication select the required authentication method from Anonymous Basic or NTLM c At Enable SSL select from these option e Check mm the check box to enable SLL secure socket layers for secure pages e Uncheck Fl the check box to disable d Click the Test SMTP Settings Test SMTP Settings button to test the SMTP Server Settings 3 Click the Next s 4 button KY DotNetNuKe a COMMUNITY Configure Host Account In this page you should provide the information for the Host or SuperUser User Account This user has access to all portals created on the site and care should be taken to provide a UserName Password combination that is difficult to hack by malicious users First Name superUser Last Name Account User Name host Password Confirm Password Email Address host ecozany com SMTP Server Settings You can configure and test your SMTP Server settings Server 127 01 0 6 Authentication Anonymous L Basic C NTLM Enable SSL Step Six Install Host Portal 1 In the Portal Administrator section complete these details e f In the First Name text box enter the Administrator s first name In the Last Name text box enter the Administrator s last name In the User Name text box enter a user name for the Administrator In the Password text box enter a password for the Admin
288. te the following settings 1 At Select Installation Method select Custom 2 At Choose Language select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard The following languages are available English Italian French German Spanish Catalan Dutch Polish Turkish Japanese Russian and Arabic 3 Click the Next s ja button DoTNerNUKe u COMMUNITY DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Version 05 05 00 Welcome to the DotNetNuke Installation Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of your DotNetNuke Application You may navigate through the Wizard using the Next and Previous buttons On some pages you will see a third button Test This button will allow you to test the configuration before you continue to see the effects of changes The first step is to select the installation method to use and to choose the language you would like to use for the Installation Custom The Custom installation method provides you with the ability to completely customise your DotNetNuke installation Select this option if you wish to control which optional components get installed Select Installation Method e Typical The Typical installation method makes some typical choices for you Auto The Auto installation method bypasses the Wizard completely and uses the legacy Auto Install procedure Choose Language English Step Two Checking File Permis
289. ted The new page is added to the site before user can change the page settings This tutorial can only be performed using the Iconbar Control Panel 1 Maximize x the Control Panel 2 On the RibbonBar go to the Current Page tab and select Import OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select Import 3 At Folder select the folder of your File Manager where the template is located This enables the template field below and populates the drop down list with all templates within this folder 4 At Template select a template from the drop down list This displays a description of the selected tem plate providing more details of the template 5 At Import Mode select Create A New Page 6 In the Page Name text box the name of the template will be displayed You can choose to enter a new page name or use this name 7 At Parent Page select None Specified to set this page as a parent page OR Select the parent page from the drop down box Note Page Editors can only select parent pages which they are editors of 8 At Insert Page select from these options to choose the location of the new page in the menu e Select a page from the drop down box and then select to add the new page either Before or After that page in the menu on the current level e Select Add to End to add the new page to the end of the menu on the current level 9 At Redirect Mode select from the following options to set where you will
290. ted By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM Setting a Workflow as Default for Site How to set a workflow as the default for the site using the HTML module This option is only available to Admin istrators Tip To set anew workflow whether it is for an individual module or you wish to set the default for the site an HTML module must first be added to some page on your site 1 Go to any HTML module 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 3 Go to the HTML Module Settings section 4 At Workflow select the workflow you wish to use Setting a Workflow 5 At Set As Default Workflow For Site select from these options e Check m the check box to set this as the default for the whole site e Uncheck p the check box to set this workflow for this module only 6 Click the Update link FH HTML Module Settings Help In this section you can set up settings that are specific for this module t Replace Tokens Fil v9 Workflow Content Staging gt gt Draft gt gt Published Allows an author to manage content in a staging area before publishing it to the site 4 Set As Default Workflow For Site qe Update Delete Cancel Created By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM Last Updated By System On 6 29 2009 1 20 34 PM Setting a Workflow How to set the workflow on an HTML module Note Administrators can also set a workflow as the site default Setting a Workflow as Default for Site Tip Wh
291. tem Click the OK button Ig Security Roles Filter By Role Group Staff AX Name Description Fee Every add New Role GS User Settings Editing a User s Security Role Access How to modify the dates a user is able to access a security role using the Security Roles module 1 2 6 WA Click the Manage Users button beside the role At User Name select the required user from the drop down box OR Enter the user s User Name into the text box and click the Validate link If the user name remains in the text box then it is valid OPTIONAL At Effective Date click the kii Calendar link and select the first date the user can access this role Where no date is selected access will be immediately granted OPTIONAL At Expiry Date click the 37 Calendar link and select the last date the user can access this role Where no date is selected access will not expire At Send Notification select from the following options e Check jy the check box to send a notification email to the user informing them of their new role access This is the default setting e Uncheck the check box to add the user to the role without notifying them Click the l Update User Role link Click sc Cancel to return Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Setting Module Permissions How to set permissions to view and edit a module Permission can be granted or denied for a role or for an individual user Additio
292. temapProvider It also uses a provider model to allow third party modules to par ticipate in Sitemap generation Host Tip Providers should be added at installation See Creating a Custom Installation Setup 1 2 B Navigate to Admin Search Engine Sitemap OR Go to a Sitemap module Below the Sitemap URL field you can view details Sitemap provider which is in use Click the Edit link beside the Sitemap Provider to be modified At Enabled select from these options e Check jj the check box to enable this Sitemap provider If only one provider is enabled skip to Step 5 i OPTIONAL At Override Priority check jj the check box to override the priority given to pages crawled by a Sitemap provider OR Uncheck p gt the check box to use the priority given to pages crawled by a Sitemap provider o ii OPTIONAL In the Priority text box enter a numerical value to set the priority for this pro vider e Uncheck aa the check box to disable it Click the Update link T Search Engine SiteMap Sitemap URL http dotnetnukeprofessional050300 install SiteMap aspx Name Description Override Priority Priority Enabled coreSitemapProvider 0 Submitting Site to Google How to submit a site for indexing to the Google search engine using the Sitemap module This tutorial assumes you have already configured the Sitemap settings See Configuring the Sitemap Settings 1 Navigate to Admin gt Search Engine Sitemap
293. ter your user name In the Password text box enter your password OPTIONAL Enter your verification code or the security code if required Check jg the Remember Login check box Click the Login Login button o o0 o Account Login TA User Name myusername t Password Remember Login Register Forgot Password Tip To exit a site simply close your web site browser If you click the Logout link you will need to login next time Related Topic e See Enabling Remember Me on Login Control Retrieving your Password If you forget your password you can have it sent to the email address associated with your user account 1 Click the Login link or navigate to an Account Login module 2 Click the Forgot Password link This opens the Retrieve Password page 3 In the User Name text box enter your user name 4 OPTIONAL If the Security Code field is displayed enter the code displayed as a picture into the Secu rity Code text box 5 Click fay Send Password If the password is successfully send the following message is displayed 2 Password Has Been Sent To Your Email Address 6 Click s Proceed to Login to go to the User Login module Retrieve Password You can request your password by providing your User Name and the Password will be sent to the email address you provided during registration t User Name myusernarme c esl Send Password Retrieving your Passworc Managing Your Profile
294. ternet Registrar setting the Primary Secondary DNS entries to point to the Hosting Providers DNS Server and having your Hosting Provider map the Domain Name to the IP Address of your account You can also use the IP Address of your site without a Domain Name i e 65 174 86 217 If you need to have multiple Domain Names pointing to the same portal then you can add multiple aliases in the portal edit interface Do not create a Parent Portal until all of the DNS mappings are in place or else you will not be able to access your portal e A Child portal is a sub portal of your Hosting Provider account Child portals are accessed by entering the URL address which includes a Parent domain name followed by the portals name E g www do tnetnuke com directory An example of a valid Child Portal Name is www dotnetnuke portalname A Child portal can be converted into a Parent portal at any time by adding a Portal Alias entry Note Portals are created using the default setting as defined on the Host Settings module such as hosting fee hosting space site log history etc Once a portal has been created these properties can be modified for individ ual portals M wu Portals He Title Portal Aliases Users Pages DiskS5pace Hosting Fee Expires Child localhost dotnetnuke 5001 child 2 17 100 20 00 11 28 2010 Child localhost dotnetnuke500 child2 1 16 100 20 00 11 30 2010 My Website localhost dotnetnuke 500 5 106 0 0 00 in Add New Portal a Export Por
295. text box enter a password c In the Confirm Password text box re enter the same password 10 Click the amp Add New User link z z Add New User Add New User User Name Marra First Name Marion amp 9 Display Name Mazza o Last Name Morton o o o Email Address marion domain cam TA Authorize Notify Optionally enter a password for this user or allow the system to generate a random password Random Password amp 9 Password eeeeees a Confirm Password a ay Add New User cancel Adding a new user Editing a User Account How to edit the details of a user s account using the User Accounts module Tip The user name field cannot be edited 1 Find the user to be edited using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit button beside their record This opens the Edit User Accounts Manage User Cre dentials page 3 Edit one or more fields as required Editable fields are the user s first name last name display name and email address 4 Click the Update link Tip Additional options are also available on the Manage Profile page z User Accounts Search A B CD EF G H JK L MN O P V Ww X Y Z All Online Unauthorized Username Nami Address Telephone Created Date Authorized X 9 paula gunther domain com Paula Gunther N A 9 4 2007 1 35 29 PM d X 93 Prince Prince Pauper N A 9 4 2007 1 58 11 PM Page lofi SF add New User Delete Unauthorized Users id
296. tgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None e Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Host Site lt Use Page Default Module Container Cache Time secs O Localization Settings About Localization Settings The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled For full details on working with this section See About Content Localization Managing Content for Individual Modules HTML Pro About the HTML HTML Pro Module The HTML module known as the HTML Pro module in DNN Professional Edition displays basic text rich text or HTML This module typically uses a Rich Text Editor See About the Rich Text Editors to enable editors to add content including images flash and script The module can be set to replace tokens with user or portal spe cific information such as user details portal name etc Tip A basic version of this module called the HTML module is provided with the DNN Community Edition and is typically titled the Text HTML module Workflow The module offers workflow support and includes two default configurations Direct Publish and Content Stag ing Direct Publish maintains the legacy behavior of the module and allows content to be published directly to the site Content Staging allows the author to save and view content
297. that page in the menu on the current level e Select Add to End to add the new page to the end of the menu on the current level 9 OPTIONAL Page templates allow you to add modules with optional content to a new page Complete the following to use a template for this page i At Template Folder select the folder where the required template is located ii At Page Template select the required template 10 At Include In Menu check jm the check box to include this page in the menu OR Uncheck p the check box to hide the page 11 At Permissions set the permissions to view and manage this page Setting Page Permissions Tip When setting Permissions change the selection at Filter By Group to set permissions for any of the related roles 7 big Page Settings FH Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this page FH Page Details Page Name Store Page Title Buy EcofriendlyToys Description Buy our Ecofriendly toys online todya All toys and games are environmentally friendly and zs manufactured using fiar labor and adhering to fiar trade practises Keywords toys ecofriendly organic toys fair trade toys fair labor toys 2 Tags Blocks Dolls Products Wooden Toys Parent Page zMone Specified gt Before After Add to End Home o Z e Template Folder Templates e Page Template Default x Incl
298. the Administrator s last name In the Email text box enter the Administrator s email address In the Password text box enter a password for the Administrator In the Confirm text box re enter the password for the Administrator 5 Click the amp Create Portal link g yy Add New Portal a Portal Setup Portal Type Parent Child Portal Alias localhost DotnetNuke500 Child Home Directory Portals PortalID Customize Title MyChild Website MyChild Website is a satellite business of our FA Description parent company MyWebsite We provide health and wellbeing services exclusively to the suburb E mywebsite massage acupuncture armadale omelbo Keywords urne health wellbeing Template DotNetNuke x Default Website Template a Security Settings Username admin First Name John Last Name Smith Email john smith domain com Password ooeeeees Confirm create Portal x Cancel Note Once your portal is created you will need to login using the Administrator information specified above Adding a lld Forta Exporting a Portal Template How to export a portal template for use with the Site Wizard or when creating a new portal The portal template includes all portal pages pages settings and module settings Module content for modules which allow import ex port can optionally be included 8 Navigate to Host gt Portals Select 4 Export Portal Templa
299. the Help icons displayed beside the User Name and Password fields to view login help Account Login User Name Julianne Chang amp Password 7 Remember Login Register Forgot Password ogging into a Site Related Topics e See Logging in with LiveID e See Logging in with OpenID e See Logging in with a Security Code e See Logging in with a Verification Code e See Logging in with a Verification Code and a Security Code Logging Out of a Site How to log out of a site and cancel the Remember Login setting 1 Click the Logout link which is typically located in the top right corner of each page ei Display Name Logout Tip The action of logging out automatically cancels the Remember Login setting To exit a site without logging out simply close your web site browser This does not cancel the Remember Login setting Remembering Login Credentials How to set a site to remember your login credentials Selecting the Remember Login will automatically log you into that site next time you visit it This feature adds a cookie to your computer so it will not work on another computer It is also portal specific so it will not log you in to other portals within this DNN installation Note At the time of writing this setting expired after 24 hours 1 Click the Login link which typically located in the top right corner OR Navigate to an Account Login module 2 In the User Name text box en
300. the area to be cropped i In the X and Y text boxes enter the X vertical and Y horizontal coordinates for the crop area ii In the Width and Height text boxes enter the width and height in pixels for the crop area 4 In the Save As text box a new name for this edited image is displayed It is in the format of file name thumb Modify this name as desired Tip Remove the thumb from the file name to override the original file The image will be saved as a jpg extension file 5 At Overwrite If File Exists check jm the check box to overwrite a file that exists with the name entered in the Save As text box OR Uncheck r4 the check box if you don t want to override an exist ing file This enables warning message if the filename already exists 6 Click the Save button Image Editor g pacity Opacity 4 p 100 56 Resize Width 4 538 p Height 4 j B06 px Constrain proportions Flip Rotate None Mone Flip Horizontal O Flip Vertical Flip Both Crop mf px Width 312 px gt Disable Crop y 156 px Height 296 px Save As AbbeyDoll thumb COverwrite if file exists 7 Problem Solving If a message box reading A file with a name same as the target already exists is dis played this is preventing you from overwriting an existing image Repeat Steps 4 and 6 Tip When Cropping an image drag and resize the crop area on the preview image Ima
301. the selected module 3 You can now choose to edit preview and or publish the unpublished content Publishing a Draft or you can rollback to a previous version Rolling Back Content My Work The following Content requires Review before it can be Published Approving or Rejecting Content This section applies to the Content Approval workflow only Once a user adds new content to a Content Approval HTML module content edits must either approve or reject the content before it can be published Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1 Goto the HTML module 2 Select 3 Approve or Reject from the HTML module menu OR Click the Approve or 4 Reject link This displays the new content in the Review Content page Edit Content v Approve o Reject 3 In the Comment text box add a comment For rejections the comment should explain why the content has been rejected 4 Click the Review link to finish the approval rejection From this page you can view the Item History table for this version of content and preview the content awaiting approval Review Content t Comment t Review Cancel Item History Preview Content This content is ready for reveiw Approving or Rejecting Conten Publishing a Draft How to publish a draft of content using the HTML module Note This tutorial only applies to the Content Staging workflow only 1 Go to the HT
302. this folder 4 At Template select a template from the drop down list The description of the selected template will be displayed providing you with more details of the template 5 At Import Mode select Replace The Current Page 6 At Redirect Mode select from the following options to set where you will be redirected to once you com plete this importing e Select View Imported Page to be redirected to the newly created page upon creation Import e Select Edit Imported Page to be redirected to the Page Settings page of the newly created page upon creation Import This enables you to configure the page settings immediately 7 Click the Import link The new page will now be added to the top level of the menu If Edit Imported Page was Selected at Step 6 you can now edit page settings as required Tip View the new page to ensure that any modules that are set to display on all pages are not duplicated This may occur if the selected template includes modules that are displayed on all pages Import Page Y Folder Templates t Template Members Members page with membership details benefits rates and registration form v Import Mode J Create a new Pag Replace the current Page Redirect Mode View imported Page Edit imported Page Import Cancel Deleting a Page How to delete a page from a site Pages set as either the Splash page Home page Login page or the User page cannot be deleted until the set
303. ting is removed The last visible portal page can also not be deleted Deleted pages are stored in the Recycle Bin where they can be restored or permanently deleted by authorized users Option One Directly from the Control Panel 1 Navigate to the required page 2 Maximize y the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to the Common Tasks tab OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section 4 Select Delete This displays the message box which reads Are you sure you want to delete this page 5 Click the OK button to confirm Mode View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE Aunt Common Tasks zh Name Page Editor nu Import paaa Disabled Use Default Site Skin Update Page Update Current Page Mode View Edit U Layout Windows Internet Explorer Page Functions lt Add Settings M Copy Export Import Deleting a page using the Iconbar Option Two Via the Site Settings Page 1 Navigate to the required parent page 2 Maximize y the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to either the Current Page or the Common Tasks tab and select Edit OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select p Settings 4 Click the Delete link located at the base of the page This displays the message box which reads Are you sure you want to delete this page 5 Click the OK button Related Topics e See About the Recycle Bin Module e See Deleting a Page from a S
304. tings section 4 AtIs Premium Module select from these options e Check p7 the check box to set the module as premium e Uncheck the check box to set the modules as not premium 5 Click the po Update Desktop Module link located at the base of the Extension Settings section Is Premium Module Available My Website ChildSite MyWebsite expired Assigning Unassigning Premium Modules to Portals How to assign or unassign a premium module on one or more portals This tutorial assumes the module has already been set as premium Note Premium modules are not auto assigned to a portal when it is created 1 2 5 Navigate to Host Module Definitions Click the Edit button beside the required module Go to the Extension Settings section At Is Premium Module choose from these options e To assign the module to a portal click on the portal name in the Available list and click the Add s button e To assign the module to all portals click the Add All button e To remove the premium module from one portal click on the portal name in the Assigned list and click the Remove 3 button e To remove the premium module from all portals click the Remove All 44 button Click the ga Cancel link to return to the Module Definitions page TA Is Premium Module Available My Website Child Site MyWebsite expired Building Your Portal and Adding Content Configuring Site Settings For A Portal About th
305. tion Select this option if you wish to control which optional components get installed Creating a Custom Installation Setup and Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard e Typical The Typical installation method makes some typical choices for you Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard e Auto The Auto installation method bypasses the Wizard completely and uses the legacy Auto Install pro cedure Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard r DotNerNuKe i gt COMMUNITY DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Version 05 05 00 Welcome to the DotNetNuke Installation Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of your DotNetNuke Application You may navigate through the Wizard using the Next and Previous buttons On some pages you will see a third button Test This button will allow you to test the configuration before you continue to see the effects of changes The first step ts to select the installation method to use and to choose the language you would like to use for the Installation O Custom The Custom installation method provides you with the ability to completely customise your DotNetNuke installation Select this option if you wish to control which optional components get installed Select Installation Method O Typical The Typical installation method makes some typical choices for you Auto The Auto installation method bypasses the Wizard completely a
306. to set the alignment of module content Tip This setting doesn t override the alignment of content formatting using the Rich Text Editor of the HTML module 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Goto the Basic Settings section 4 At Alignment select Left Center Right or Not Specified 5 Click the T Update link Page Settings In this section you can define settings specific to this particular occurrence of the Module for this Page lH Basic Settings Icon Link Type None File A File On Your Site System Image Alignment Left Center Right Not Specified Color lightgray Border Collapse Expand Maximized Minimized None Display Container Allow Print Allow Syndicate Is a WebSlice Web Slice Title MyWebslice Web Slice Expires 7 31 2010 Calendar Web Slice TTL 10 Module Container 9 PEE a lt Use Page Default Preview Cache Time secs g Alignment of module conten Setting Module Background Color How to set the background color of a module Tip The look of this setting is dependent on the design of the module container applied to the module 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button 2 Maximize the Page Settings section 3 Gotothe Basic Settings section 4 In the Color text box enter a
307. to the Vendors web site e Select URL A Link To An External Resource and enter the URL user will be taken to when they click on the banner name This URL is also displayed below the banner e Select Page A Page On Your Site and select the page users go to when they click on this banner e Select File A File On Your Site and select the file to be displayed when a user clicks on this banner 3 In the CPM Cost text box enter the cost per 1000 Impressions or the once off cost E g For every 1000 impressions of the banner the Vendor will charge the listed amount Alternatively the vendor may charge a flat fee for banner advertising 4 In the Impressions text box enter the number of impressions the banner will display for A impression is made each time a banner is displayed on the page 5 At Start Date click the Calendar link and select the first date the banner will be dis played 6 At End Date click the Calendar link and select the last date the banner will be displayed 7 At Criteria select one of the following options e And Banner only expires if both the Impressions and the End Date has been met I e The banner has reached its number of clicks AND a banner has expired e Or Banner expires if either the Impressions or the End Date has been met I e The banner has reached its number of clicks OR the banner has expired 7 Click the Update link Edit Banner Banner Name Banner Type Banner Gr
308. tors only This allows you to add content to the page before setting it as viewable by one or more user roles See Setting Page Permissions View Edit Layout Common Tasks Name About Us Default After Home Add Page Adding a Page via the Page Settings Page How to add a new page to a site 1 2 Maximize x the Control Panel On the RibbonBar select the Common Tasks tab and then select T New OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and then select Add Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section In the Page Name text box enter a name for the page This is the name which appears in the menu Note Page Name is the only mandatory field OPTIONAL Complete Permissions if displayed Note If permissions are not displayed the new page will inherit the permissions of its parent page If Permissions are displayed but not set then the page will be visible to Administrator s only See Setting Page Permissions Recommended Complete the other basic settings for this page Basic Settings for New Pages In the Localization section select the required option See Localization Settings for New Pages Note The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled See About Content Localization 8 OPTIONAL Complete advanced page settings as required Setting Advanced Settings for New Pages 9 Click the amp Update link 7 big Page Settings FH Basic Settings I
309. ttings for this role f Role Name Marketing Description Members of staff within the Marketing department TA Role Group Public Role aa TA Auto Assignment F Advanced Settings Update Cancel Creating a Membership Service How to create a Membership Service using the Security Roles module A Membership Service is a security role which is set as Public These roles are displayed to users when they manage their account under the Manage Serv ices link on the Manage Profile page For here users can view details of the available membership services and elect to subscribe to or unsubscribe to them A trial period trial fee service period and service fee can also be set for membership services See Adding a Security Role with a Fee 1 Select J Add New Role from the module menu 2 In the Basic Settings section complete the following fields In the Role Name text box enter a name for the role In the Description text box enter a brief description of the role OPTIONAL At Role Group select a role group for this role if required gt e At Public Role check jj the check box to set this role as a Membership Service 7 OPTIONAL At Auto Assignment select from the following options e Check mm the check box to assign all users to this role This includes both existing and new users e Uncheck the check box if users must subscribe to the role 8 Click the Update link The new role is now displayed as
310. ucts are Fair Labor and Fair Trade developing countries are not disadvantaged Edit Content Ki e Layout Displays the layout of page panes and any modules within those panes Module content is hidden This option enables you to view the design of the page skin without the distraction of module content Mode View Edit Layout DOTNETNUKE 8 grian s af Admin Y j O lg DOTNETNUKE ABOUT US You are here About Us Administrator Account Logout TopPane LeftPane ContentPane RightPane About Us eo BottomPane HOME OURTOYS STORE ABOUTUS ADMIN DOTNETNUKE Common Tasks Name Add Module Mo a New Existing Template Default Include in menu Insert After Home ka Insert Page Adding and Managing Pages About Pages DNN sites are created by adding one or more pages and then adding modules which display content onto those pages This section provides information on viewing adding and managing pages Additional functionality is avail able to Administrators and SuperUsers using the Pages Tabs module See About the Tabs module Related Topics e See About Page Permissions Viewing Any Page How to view any page within a site including those which are not included in the menu e Option One If the page is visible included in the menu then navigate to the page using the site menu e Option Two If the page is hidden not included in the menu click on a link to the hidden page
311. ude In Menu 7 Insert Page Permissions Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators 3 a a Ir Ga a zl ie A A AllUsers o o O o O o Registered Users O O g O El O Subscribers O O O O O O a Unauthenticated cops O O Username nla Add Copy Page FH Localization Culture Type Create Single Neutral Culture Page Create in Current Culture only Create Localized Versions of Page Advanced Settings P Update cancel Basic settings for New Pages Basic Settings for Existing Pages How to set the basic setting for existing pages on the Page Settings page See Editing Page Settings Note Page Name field is the only mandatory field The 10 11 Go to the Basic Settings Page Details section and edit any of the following settings In the Page Name text box enter a name for the page If this page is displayed in the menu this will be the name in the menu In the Page Title text box enter a short descriptive sentence summarizing the page content The title is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page It is recommended that the title contains at least 5 highly descriptive words and does not exceed 200 characters In the Description text box enter a description of the page content The description is used by sea
312. ult but can also be configured to aggregate multiple RSS feeds from different sources into one easy to use module Module Version 01 00 00 Feed Explorer Yahoo My Yahoo Mail More F Make Y your home page YAHOO News Search a U S Business World Entertainment Sports Tech Politics Video Phat Cpinion Local Odd News fave Weather Peo News Photos HIGHLIGHT Parade for respect A Ro rainbow colours during a and ask for the respect of 7 05 PM ET Slideshow CEJ Ed v v1 add ne Manage Settings Displaying DNN Solutions in the Feed Explorer How to display DNN Solutions using the Feed Explorer module This enables users to obtain DNN modules skins user manuals video training and other DNN solutions many of which have been verified as fully compatible with DNN Information is grouped using the following tabs e Marketplace This tab provides access to the DNN Marketplace Snowcovered com which sells exten sions for DNN Many of these extensions have all been reviewed by DNN Corporation so you can be con fident that they will not break or cause errors on your site This tab is divided into three sections o Modules DNN modules for sale o Skins Skins and containers sale o Other Other DNN products for sale including components eBooks providers including authen tication systems and language packages and DNN services including DNN Sponsorship e DNN This tab displays a list of the current DNN core proje
313. ults Note Tags can be created by users See Tagging Page Content or editors See Creating a Vocabulary Click the amp Update link Setting Module Permissions How to set permissions to view and edit a module Permission can be granted or denied for a role or for an individual user Additional permission types are available on some modules such as the Events module Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Fine grain management of modules is available In Professional Edition by providing these additional settings Delete Import Export Manage Settings and Full Control 1 2 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the Module Settings Basic Settings section Go to the Permissions field and select from the following options OPTIONAL In the Username text box enter the username of a user to whom you wish to grant or deny module permissions and then click the l Add link Repeat for additional usernames OPTIONAL At Filter By Group select from the following options e lt All Roles gt Select to view all roles both global and group roles in one single list e lt Global Roles gt Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group This includes Administrators All Users Registered Users and Unauthenticated Users e Role Name Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group 6 OPTIONAL At Inherit View permissio
314. unctions section and select Settings 4 Go the Basic Settings Page Details section 5 At Copy Permissions to Descendants click the Copy Permissions link 6 Click the 45 Update link om Page Settings El Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic settings for this page El Page Details Page Name Tabs Page Title Description Keywords Parent Page lt None Specified Include In Menu Permissions Filter By Group lt Global Roles gt Add Manage Full View Add Content Copy Delete Export Import Settings Navigate Control Administrators 9 t3 iz f a a Ga CJ A CJ All Users 9 O O O O O a Product Managers D O O O O O O O Registered Users O O O O O O O Subscribers OO O O O O O Unauthenticated Tuin O O O O O O O O Username I Add Copy Permissions to a T Descendants Copy Permissions opying permissions to descendant pages Exporting a Page How to export a page This enables you to create a page template which you can then import This option is only available on the Iconbar Control Panel 1 Navigate to the required page Viewing Any Page 2 Maximize x the Control Panel 3 On the RibbonBar go to the Current Page tab and select ha Export OR On the Iconbar go the Page Functions section and select a Export 4 At Folder select a folder of the site s File Manager where the exported page will be stored 5 In the Templ
315. until the correct permission is displayed e Permission Granted Permission to view the page is granted e j Permission Denied Permission to view the page is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users cannot view the page unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission or are granted Full Control Edit Page permissions 6 If you are using DNN Community Edition Skip to Step 15 7 In the Add column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Add permissions for a page can add child pages to that page They cannot add any parent pages and they cannot add child pages to any other pages e j Permission Denied Permission to add child pages is denied unless Full Control is granted e Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to add pages unless they belong to another role username which has been granted permission 8 In the Add Content column select from these options e 3 Permission Granted Users with Add Content permissions for a page can edit content on the page These users can add move and delete modules as well as manage the content and settings for modules on the page e j Permission Denied Permission to add and manage module content is denied unless Full Con trol is granted Not Specified Permissions are not specified Users are unable to view the page unless they belong to another ro
316. users are able to view and manage the module This page also controls more advanced settings related to the design of the module containers borders printing and site wide module set tings All modules have a Settings page which is accessed by clicking the Settings option in the module menu or by click ing the Settings 4 button at the base of the module The Module Settings page enables authorized users to mod ify basic module settings related to the module content e g module title module header and footer module start and end dates and module permissions e g which roles are able to view and edit a module This page also con trols more advanced settings related to the design of the module containers borders printing and site wide mod ule settings The page is divided into these three major sections e Module Settings Settings relating to the Module content Module Settings are settings which are the same on all pages where the Module appears This section includes module permissions where access to view edit and manage the module is set Some modules have additional permissions to add edit and man age module content This section is divided into Basic Settings Advanced Settings and Added to Pages e Page Settings Settings specific to this particular occurrence of the module for this page This section is divided into Basic Settings and Advanced Settings e Module Specific Settings Several modules have additional settings
317. using the Iconbar The module content is shared so if you update the content on one module the content in the other module also updates Important You cannot add an existing module to the page where it already exists Tip You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add a module to a page 1 Maximize y the Control Panel 2 Go the Module Insertion section and select Add Existing Module 3 At Page select the page where the existing module is located 4 At Module select the module to be added 5 OPTIONAL At Visibility select from the following options e Same As Page This sets the module as visible to all roles users who can view this page This is the default setting e Page Editors Only The sets module as only visible only to the roles user who can edit this page Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module 6 OPTIONAL At Pane select the pane you want to insert the module into The module is added to the Con tent Pane by default The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page If you select a pane other than the Content Pane the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page 7 OPTIONAL At Insert select the placement of the module from the first drop down box One or more of the following options is available depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane
318. uto Assignment All registered users are automatically added to these roles upon registration If the role is also set as Public users can unsubscribe and unsubscribe to it If the role is set as Private only Admin istrators can manage user access Adding a Security Role Basic Settings How to add a basic security role to a site using the Security Roles module 1 Select Ja Add New Role from the module menu 2 In the Basic Settings section complete the following fields a In the Role Name text box enter a name for the Security Role b In the Description text box enter a brief description of the Security Role c OPTIONAL At Role Group select a group for this role if desired d At Public Role select one of the following options e Check jm the check box if all users are able to view details of this role and subscribe to this role Users can subscribe to or unsubscribe from these roles when they manage their pro file e Uncheck r4 the check box if the role is Private Only Administrators can add a user to a pri vate role unless it has an RSVP Code or RSVP Link see below which has been supplied to the user e At Auto Assignment choose from the following options e Check jm the check box if users are automatically assigned to this role e Uncheck r4 the check box if users must be manually added to the role 4 Click the Update link gl Edit Security Roles a Basic Settings In this section you can set up the basic se
319. vered com Related Topics e See About Module Settings and the related section for details on setting the module settings which are common to all modules e See Installing Available Extensions e See Installing a New Module HOME OUR TOYS STORE ABOUT US ADMIN in cw qa You are here Home Administrator Account Logout Search Input amp Media Se O Search Go Hello from EcoZany gt O The EcoZany toy store is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZany products are handmade All handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade Visit our online toy catalog to find out how to maximize your fun whilst minimizing your global impact E gt Ii dd Tags HOME OURTOYS STORE ABOUTUS ADMIN A page which has the Search Input HTML and Media modules added to it Module Basics About Module Basics All users can perform the following actions on modules however these actions may be disabled on one or more modules e See Minimizing and Maximizing Content e See Printing Content e See Subscribing to Syndicated Content e See Tagging Page Content Adding a New Module How to a new module to a page using the RibbonBar Adding a new module inserts a module without content into the current page Tip You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add a module to a page Important If content localization is enabled S
320. viewable to Unauthenticated Users but not to All Users The when a users logs into the site the page or module would no longer be displayed This could be used for information about joining the site which isn t relevant to users who are already registered e Module Deployer A Module Deployer is any person or role who has been granted permission to add one or more types of modules to site pages This term is used on the Extensions module About Security Role Settings Security Roles can be configured in a number of ways to change the way users can access roles The following options are available e Public Role Roles set as public enable all registered users to be able to subscribe or unsubscribe to the role Public Roles are managed by authenticated users under Membership Services on the My Profile mod ule e Private Role When a role is not set as public it is a private role Only Administrators have access to man age user access to these roles unless the role includes an RSVP Code e RSVP Code When a role includes an RSVP code users can subscribe to the role by entering the code into a text box under Manage Services on their profile This provides a quick way to subscribe and also enables subscriptions to be limited to those with the code if the role is set as Private e RSVP Link The RSVP link setting automatically adds a user to that role when they go to the RSVP link This provides a very easy way of subscribing to a role e A
321. w this banner looks in the Banners module with a one pixel border Related Topics e See Working with the Calendar Adding an Image Banner to a Vendor How to add an image banner to a vendor account using the Vendors module 1 Locate the required vendor account by using a filter or by searching 2 Click the Edit g button beside the required Vendor This opens the Edit Vendor page 3 Maximize the Banner Advertising section This displays all banners associated with this vendor 4 Click the Add New Banner link 5 Complete the following banner fields 1 In the Banner Name text box enter a name for this banner If the Text Script field below is left blank then the Banner Name is the alternate text for the banner 2 At Banner Type select either Banner MicroButton Button Block or Skyscraper 3 OPTIONAL In the Banner Group text box enter a name to group this banner with other banners The banner group can then be entered into the banners module to set it to only display banners in this group 4 At Image Link select the image for this banner See Setting a File Link 5 The following optional settings are also available 1 In the Text Script text box enter the text of the banner This is the alternate text for this banner and is displayed when a user mouses over the image 2 At URL select one of the following options e Select URL A Link To An External Resource and leave the text box empty This sets the link
322. which are specific to this module type This section is typically named according to the module type E g This section is named Links Set tings on the Links module Modules which have specific settings include the Announcements Documents Events FAQs and many more Module Settings Basic Settings Setting the Module Title How to edit the module title via the Module Settings page You may also be able to edit to title inline See Editing Module Title Inline Tip The Display Container setting must be checked for this setting If it isn t the Title cannot be viewed Tip The Title only displays if the container applied to the module includes the TITLE skin token 1 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings 47 button 2 Goto the Module Settings Basic Settings section 3 In the Module Title text box edit the module title a Basic Settings Module TA Module Title 4 Click the amp Update link Administrator Profile Home Profile of our Wholistic Therapist Course Timetable Holistic Services e Module title Setting Module Tags How to associate one or more tags with a module 1 2 4 Select f Settings from the module menu OR Click the Settings button Go to the Module Settings Basic Settings section At Tags select one or more tags to be associated with this page Page tagging is a way of categorizing con tent for more meaningful search res
323. wsletter without using replacement tokens or personalization using the Newsletters module 1 Go to the Basic Settings section and complete these fields a At Addressees complete one or both of these options i At User Role s check a the check box beside each of the roles to receive the news letter Note that users in multiple roles will only receive one copy of the newsletter ii In the Additional Emails text box enter each of the email addresses to receive the news letter separated by a semi colon E g JohnBlack d omain com JulieBlack domain com b OPTIONAL In the From text box enter modify the email address to be displayed in the From field of this newsletter If you are logged in to the site the email address associated with your user account is displayed here by default c OPTIONAL In the Reply To text box enter the reply to email address for the email d In the Subject text box enter a subject title for the email e In the Message section enter the body of the newsletter into the editor Select Basic Text Box to send a plain text email OR Select Rich Text Box to send an HTML email with formatting and images 2 OPTIONAL Click the Preview Email link to preview the newsletter 3 OPTIONAL Maximize the Advanced Settings section to set any of the following optional settings i At Attachment select the required attachment See Setting a File Link ii At Replace Tokens uncheck p the check box ii
324. ww News Letters Link to Admin gt Newsletters See About the Newsletters Module Me Extensions Link to Admin gt Extensions See About the Extensions Module e Skins Link to Admin Skins See About the Skins Module A Languages Link to Admin gt Languages See About the Languages Module Logs Section A Event Log Link to Admin gt Event Log See About the Log Viewer Module Site Log Link to Admin gt Site Log See About the Site Log Module Restore Section Recycle Bin Link to Admin gt Recycle Bin See About the Recycle Bin Module Mode View Edit Layout Common Tasks DOTNETNUKE Assess famin Current Page Admin galan ae lo News Letters Event Log Recycle Bin FI Can g r YE py io ue aad Fil Extensions Lal Manage Features Host Tab Settings Section ite Host Settings P Console Manage Section Ng Super Users m File Manager ula Extensions Wi Sites Information Section EF Dashboard What s New Web Servers 4 Support Tools Section Scheduler zi SQL A Integrity Switch Site Section Switch Site Marketplace Section Marketplace Description Link to Host Settings See About the Host Settings Page Link to Host Console See About the Host Pages Link to Host gt Super Users See About the Host Page Link to Host gt File Manager See About the File Manager Module Link to Host gt Extensions See About the Extensions Module Link to Host gt
325. www dotnetnuke com through URL Update Cancel Editing Banner Options How to edit the settings applied to the Banners module 1 Select Banner Options from the module menu 2 Edit the options as required 3 Click the Update link ka i Edit Banner t Banner Source Host 9 Site Banner Type Button Banner Group premium Banner Count 5 Orientation Vertical Horizontal Border Width Q Border Color CornflowerBlue amp Cell Padding 4 Row Height 100 Row Width 250 Banner Click http www dotnetnuke com through URL Update Cancel Editing Banner Options Displaying Banners Horizontally How to set the Banners module to display banners horizontally across the page 1 Select Banner Options from the module menu 2 At Orientation select Horizontal 3 OPTIONAL In the Column Width text box enter a number to set the width of each column cell If this setting is left empty the banners may not align evenly across the module 4 Click the Update link Displaying Banners Vertically How to set the banners module to display banners vertically down the page 1 Select Banner Options from the module menu 2 At Orientation select Vertical 3 Click the Update link Banners Setting Banner Spacing 1 How to set the width and height of the invisible table cells which each banner is displayed within 2 Select Banner Options from the module menu I
326. xt box enter the Database name c At Integrated Security select from these options e Check jm the check box if you are using SQL Server s Integrated Security and will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option e Uncheck r4 the check box if you have been given a UserId Password to access your Data base and provide the UserId Password combination 1 In the User ID text box enter the UserID for the Database 2 In the Password text box enter the Password for the Database d At Run as db Owner select from these options e Check jm the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner e Uncheck r4 the check box if you will be running as the User ID specified e OPTIONAL In the Object Qualifier text box enter a prefix to use for all your database objects this helps ensure that there are no object name clashes Click the Test Database Connection Test Database Connection button If the test is successful message reading Connection Success is displayed If the test is unsuccessful an error message is dis played Click the Next s ex button KY DoTNETNUIce COMMUNITY a Configure Database Connection You can configure the database settings used by DotNetNuke on this page If you are installing DotNetNuke in a Hosting Account your hosting provider should have provided you with the information The
327. yed 3 To modify the table perform any of these actions To add a column At Columns click the Increase 4 button To remove a column At Columns click the Decrease button To insert a column span select a cell and then at Column Span click the Increase button To remove a column span select a cell and then at Column Span click the Decrease button To add a row At Rows click the Increase 4 button To remove a row At Row click the Decrease button To insert a row span select a cell and then at Row Span click the Increase button To remove a row span select a cell and then at Row Span click the Decrease button 4 OPTIONAL Select a new tab to set additional properties 5 Click the OK button Table Wizard Table Design Table Properties Cell Properties Accessibility Columns Rows Columns dp Column Span ss em Rows a Row Span e Using the Style Builder How to create CSS styles for tables using the Style Builder of the RADEditor The Style Builder can be accessed from the Table Properties tab of the Table Wizard when adding or editing a table See Setting Table Properties 1 At Style Builder click the Style Builder button This opens the Style Builder window The Font tab will be displayed 2 Setthe following Font properties a Goto the Font Name section i At Family select the required font type b Go to the Font Attributes section 1 At Color click the Color Picker
328. ymbol gal lery and then select the required symbol to be inserted OPTION TWO Click the Insert Symbol icon to insert the symbol that was inserted previously Click on the number of rows columns to insert a basic table OR Select Table Wizard to design a more complex table Inserts a predefined code snippet Select the image and then click the icon Drag the image to the required absolute position Opens the Image Map Editor where you can configure a image map for this image Transforms selected text to lower case Transforms selected text to upper case Select to toggle Editor to from full screen mode Click to view the changes between your initial content and current content Content changes are marked up with green background for new content and red strikethrough for deleted content Opens the About RadEditor window which has a link more information on the RadEditor Managing Images and Media Inserting a Document How to insert a document using the RADEditor 1 Click the Document Manager button This opens the Document Manager 2 Navigate to and select the required document See Using the Resource Manager 3 OPTIONAL In the Link Text text box modify the text associated with this document The filename is used by default 4 OPTIONAL At Target select the target window for this link 5 OPTIONAL In the Tooltip text box enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user mouses over this link 6 OPTIONAL At CSS C
329. ys a preview and or properties of the selected file Properties can be mod ified as required Viewing Word and Character Count The number of words and characters inside the RADEditor is displayed in the bottom right corner These are updated each time you click inside the editor after a modification Edit Content Editor Basic Text Box Rich Text Editor COMPANY INFORMATION EcoZany is an online shop that sells a wide range of Eco Friendly toys and games Many EcoZany products are handmade All handmade products are Fair Labor and Fair Trade FAIR TRADE EcoZany has developed a pricing structure for our products which ensures producers in developing countries are not disadvantaged a n Tina PF Design lt gt HTML C Words 51 Characters 323 2 ap Save Cancel oS Preview Toolbars Actions Toolbar The actions toolbar of the RADEditor has the following tools Tool Icon Description Print all Editor content Depending on your computer set up you may be able to print to a printer and or create an XPS doc Print CTRL P ument Print Options Tool AJAX Spellchecker Find amp Replace CTRL F Select All CTRL A Cut CTRL X Copy CTRL V Paste CTRL P Paste Options Undo CTRL Z Redo CTRL Y Color and CSS Toolbar 3 m ae zz 5e E Ae Description e Print All Linked Documents Creates separate printouts for each link E g Page links display the p
330. zip the files later if required 6 Click the T Upload File link Upload File Portal Root C DotNethuke Releases DotNetNuke 04 06 00 Install BETA1 Portals 0 C Umages FileManagerAlIClipArt zip Upload File AF Decompress ZIP Files Optional Unzipping Compressed Files How to decompress a zipped folder of files in the File Manager module 1 Navigate to and select the Folder containing the file to be unzipped 2 Click the Unzip File f button beside the file to be decompressed A dialog box asking UnZip Files s FileName is displayed 3 Click the OK button A message asking you to select the destination folder from the Folder Explorer is dis played Unzipping File AllClipArt zip From Folder Portal Root clipart To Folder Select Destination Folder from Folder Explorer Cancel 4 Navigate to and select the folder you want to unzip the files to Note To select the folder in which the zip file is located you will need to select the folder name twice Unzip Selected Files To Portal Root Medial Ok Cancel 5 Click the OK button to confirm The files are now unzipped in the selected folder The original zip file is still located in the original folder Downloading a File How to download a file from the File Manager 1 Navigate to Admin gt File Manager OR Click E Files in the Control Panel

DotNetNuke User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents